Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 312

Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications

1011648

Effective December 6, 2006, this report has been made publicly available in accordance
with Section 734.3(b)(3) and published in accordance with Section 734.7 of the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations. As a result of this publication, this report is subject to only
copyright protection and does not require any license agreement from EPRI. This notice
supersedes the export control restrictions and any proprietary licensed material notices
embedded in the document prior to publication.
Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair
Applications

1011648
Technical Update, March 2005

EPRI Project Manager


S. Findlan

Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) 3412 Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, California 94304 PO Box 10412, Palo Alto, California 94303 USA
800.313.3774 650.855.2121 askepri@epri.com www.epri.com
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF
LIABILITIES
THIS DOCUMENT WAS PREPARED BY THE ORGANIZATION(S) NAMED BELOW AS AN
ACCOUNT OF WORK SPONSORED OR COSPONSORED BY THE ELECTRIC POWER RESEARCH
INSTITUTE, INC. (EPRI). NEITHER EPRI, ANY MEMBER OF EPRI, ANY COSPONSOR, THE
ORGANIZATION(S) BELOW, NOR ANY PERSON ACTING ON BEHALF OF ANY OF THEM:
(A) MAKES ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION WHATSOEVER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, (I)
WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF ANY INFORMATION, APPARATUS, METHOD, PROCESS, OR
SIMILAR ITEM DISCLOSED IN THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR (II) THAT SUCH USE DOES NOT INFRINGE ON OR
INTERFERE WITH PRIVATELY OWNED RIGHTS, INCLUDING ANY PARTY'S INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY, OR (III) THAT THIS DOCUMENT IS SUITABLE TO ANY PARTICULAR USER'S
CIRCUMSTANCE; OR
(B) ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHATSOEVER
(INCLUDING ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF EPRI OR ANY EPRI REPRESENTATIVE
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES) RESULTING FROM YOUR
SELECTION OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR ANY INFORMATION, APPARATUS, METHOD,
PROCESS, OR SIMILAR ITEM DISCLOSED IN THIS DOCUMENT.
ORGANIZATION(S) THAT PREPARED THIS DOCUMENT
Flenner Engineering Services

This is an EPRI Technical Update report. A Technical Update report is intended as an informal
report of continuing research, a meeting, or a topical study. It is not a final EPRI technical report.

ORDERING INFORMATION
Requests for copies of this report should be directed to EPRI Orders and Conferences, 1355
Willow Way, Suite 278, Concord, CA 94520. Toll-free number: 800.313.3774, press 2, or
internally x5379; voice: 925.609.9169; fax: 925.609.1310.
Electric Power Research Institute and EPRI are registered service marks of the Electric Power
Research Institute, Inc.
Copyright 2005 Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. All rights reserved.
CITATIONS
This document was prepared by
Flenner Engineering Services
6537 Wyndham Drive
Kalamazoo, MI 49000
Principal Investigator
P. Flenner
This document describes research sponsored by the Electric Power Research Institute
(EPRI).
The publication is a corporate document that should be cited in the literature in the
following manner:
Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA: 2005.
1011648.

iii
iv
ABSTRACT
The Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications provides a comprehensive
reference to assist maintenance supervisors, job planners, and repair/replacement
engineers in obtaining information relative to repair or replacement of components in
nuclear applications. The handbook also provides information on repair processes such
as welding, machining, and heat treatment, and suggests some repair techniques for
preventing future problems. This handbook is intended to be essentially a single source
for the information on materials and processes that are needed to plan a successful repair
in nuclear applications. The Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications
provides material and process details that will assist in repair efforts, including process
applications, P-Nos., basic chemistry and mechanical property data, common applications
and limitations, product forms & specifications.

v
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................XI
SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION
HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK ........................................................................... 1-3
1 MATERIAL SELECTION ....................................................................................... 1-1
2 REPAIR/REPACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS...................................................... 2-1
3 SELECTION OF PROCESSES ............................................................................ 3-1
4 PROCESS QUALIFICATION ................................................................................ 4-1
Welding and Brazing .......................................................................................... 4-1
Nondestructive Examination............................................................................... 4-2
Heat Treatment .................................................................................................. 4-3
Protective Coatings ............................................................................................ 4-3
Other Special Processes.................................................................................... 4-4
5 FAILURE MECHANISMS...................................................................................... 5-1
PRIMARY PRESSURE FAILURE ...................................................................... 5-1
FATIGUE............................................................................................................ 5-1
PRIMARY LOAD FAILURES.............................................................................. 5-2
WATER HAMMER, STEAM HAMMER, AND SLUGGING FAILURES .............. 5-2
FORMS OF CORROSION ................................................................................. 5-2
Uniform Attack.................................................................................................... 5-2
Galvanic Corrosion............................................................................................. 5-2
Crevice Corrosion............................................................................................... 5-3
Pitting ................................................................................................................. 5-3
Intergranular Corrosion ...................................................................................... 5-3
Stress Corrosion................................................................................................. 5-3
Flow Assisted Corrosion (FAC) .......................................................................... 5-4
Microbiologically Induced Corrosion (MIC)......................................................... 5-4
OTHER FAILURE MECHANISMS ..................................................................... 5-4
Hydrogen Cracking............................................................................................... 5-4
Solidification Cracking (Hot Cracking).................................................................. 5-5
Fouling.................................................................................................................. 5-6
SECTION II MATERIALS
6 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS.......................... 6-1
7 CARBON STEELS (P NO. 1) ................................................................................ 7-1
Cutting Methods: ................................................................................................ 7-1
Welding: ............................................................................................................. 7-1
Service Precautions: .......................................................................................... 7-2
Carbon Equivalent:............................................................................................. 7-2
8 CARBON MOLYBDENUM STEELS (P NO. 3) ..................................................... 8-1
Cutting Methods: ................................................................................................ 8-1

vii
Welding: ............................................................................................................. 8-1
Service Precautions: .......................................................................................... 8-2
Carbon Equivalent:............................................................................................. 8-2
9 LOW CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS (P NO. 4) ....................................... 9-1
Cutting Methods: ................................................................................................ 9-1
Welding: ............................................................................................................. 9-1
Service Precautions: .......................................................................................... 9-2
Carbon Equivalent:............................................................................................. 9-3
10 HIGH CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS (P NOS. 5A AND 5B) .............. 10-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 10-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 10-2
Service Precautions: ........................................................................................ 10-3
Carbon Equivalent:........................................................................................... 10-3
11 MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 6) .............................................. 11-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 11-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 11-2
Service Precautions: ........................................................................................ 11-2
12 AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 8) ................................................. 12-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 12-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 12-1
Service Precautions: ........................................................................................ 12-4
13 NICKEL ALLOYS (P NOS. 42, 43, & 45) .......................................................... 13-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 13-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 13-1
Service Precautions: ........................................................................................ 13-2
14 NICKEL ALLOY STEELS (P NO. 9A & 9B) ...................................................... 14-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 14-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 14-1
15 DUPLEX STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 10H).................................................... 15-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 15-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 15-1
Service Precautions: ........................................................................................ 15-2
16 COPPER ALLOYS (P NOS. 31, 32, 33, & 107 (brazing)) ................................. 16-1
Cutting Methods: .............................................................................................. 16-1
Welding: ........................................................................................................... 16-1
Brazing and Soldering: ..................................................................................... 16-2
SECTION III PROCESSES
17 METAL REMOVAL AND CUTTING PROCESSES........................................... 17-1
THERMAL PROCESSES ................................................................................ 17-1
Oxygen-Fuel Gas Cutting and Gouging ........................................................... 17-2
Plasma Arc Cutting........................................................................................... 17-2

viii
Carbon-Arc Gouging and Cutting ..................................................................... 17-3
NONTHERMAL PROCESSES......................................................................... 17-3
Machining ......................................................................................................... 17-3
Grinding............................................................................................................ 17-4
Water Jet Cutting and Gouging ........................................................................ 17-4
Electrical Discharge Machining ........................................................................ 17-4
Mechanical Discharge Machining..................................................................... 17-4
18 WELDING AND RELATED PROCESSES ........................................................ 18-1
Gas Tungsten Arc Welding .............................................................................. 18-1
Shielded Metal Arc Welding ............................................................................. 18-2
Gas Metal Arc Welding..................................................................................... 18-2
Flux Cored Arc Welding ................................................................................... 18-3
Plasma Arc Welding ......................................................................................... 18-4
Torch Brazing ................................................................................................... 18-4
Soldering .......................................................................................................... 18-4
19 HEAT TREATMENT.......................................................................................... 19-1
Preheat............................................................................................................. 19-1
Interpass Temperature Control ........................................................................ 19-3
Intermediate Heat Treatment (Hydrogen Bake-Out) ........................................ 19-3
Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT)................................................................... 19-4
Material Heat Treatment................................................................................... 19-5
20 OTHER PROCESSES ...................................................................................... 20-1
Freeze Seals .................................................................................................... 20-1
Shot Peening.................................................................................................... 20-2
21 REPAIR TECHNIQUES .................................................................................... 21-1
On-Line Repair Techniques ............................................................................. 21-1
Overlays ........................................................................................................... 21-1
Temper Bead.................................................................................................... 21-1
22 References........................................................................................................ 22-1

ix
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of the Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications is to assist
maintenance supervisors, job planners, and repair/replacement engineers in obtaining
information relative to repair or replacement of components in nuclear applications. The
handbook also provides information on repair processes such as welding, machining, and
heat treatment, and suggests some repair techniques for preventing future problems. This
handbook is intended to be essentially a single source for the information on materials
and processes that are needed to plan a successful repair in nuclear applications. . The
Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications provides material and process
details that will assist in repair efforts, including process applications, P-Nos., basic
chemistry and mechanical property data, common applications and limitations, product
forms & specifications.

There are three major sections within the handbook; General, Materials, and Processes.
The General Section is subdivided into Chapters addressing:

1. How to Use This Handbook


2. Material Selection
3. Repair/Replacement Considerations
4. Selection of Processes
5. Process Qualification
6. Failure Mechanisms

The Materials Section is subdivided into Chapters addressing:

1. General Material Classifications and Groupings


2. Carbon Steels (P No. 1)
3. Carbon/Molybdenum Steels (P No. 3)
4. Low Chromium/Molybdenum Steels (P No. 4)
5. High Chromium/Molybdenum Steels (P Nos.5A & 5B)
6. Martensitic Stainless Steels (P No. 6)
7. Austenitic Stainless Steels (P No. 8)
8. Nickel Alloys (P Nos. 42, 43, & 45)
9. Nickel Alloy Steels (P Nos. 9A & 9B)
10.Duplex Stainless Steels (P No. 10H)
11.Copper Alloys (P Nos. 31, 32, 33, & 107)

Each chapter is generally organized such that the materials that belong to the particular
category are individually discussed with pertinent information such as:

xi
General Information (P Nos., UNS numbers, etc.)
o Welding
Processes
Filler Metals
P No. Data
Specific Requirements
PWHT
o Finishing
o Repair Methodology
o Service Precautions
Specification Requirements
o Chemical Compositions
o Carbon Equivalent (as applicable)
o FN Number Range (as applicable)
o Material Properties
Tensile Strength
Yield Strength
Ductility
Lower Transformation Temperature (Ac1)
Toughness
Hardness
o Heat Treatment
o Common Applications

The Processes Section is subdivided into Chapters addressing:

1. Metal Removal and Cutting Processes


2. Welding and Related Processes
3. Heat Treatment
4. Other Processes
5. Repair Techniques

The focus of this document is repair or replacement of components found in nuclear


power plants. While it may contain pertinent information, it is not intended to support
original construction. References are provided which may provide other useful
information, some of which may be needed to supplement this handbook for difficult or
unique repair problems. It is also necessary to verify that applicable Code requirements
are being met, as this handbook cannot be considered a substitute for them. Much of the
information is available in other sources but a concentrated source book should reduce
the amount of research needed to plan a nuclear plant repair or replacement.

xii
SECTION I GENERAL INFORMATION
HOW TO USE THIS HANDBOOK
The purpose of the Materials Handbook for Nuclear Repair Applications is to assist job
planners and repair/replacement engineers in obtaining information relative to repair or
replacement of components in nuclear applications. The Materials Handbook for Nuclear
Repair Applications provides material and process details that will assist in repair efforts,
including process applications, P-Nos., basic chemistry and mechanical property data,
common applications and limitations, product forms & specifications. The handbook
also provides information on repair processes such as welding, machining, and heat
treatment, and suggests some repair techniques for preventing future problems. This
handbook is intended to be the prime source for the information on materials and
processes that are needed to plan a successful repair in nuclear applications.

When a need is found to replace components in a nuclear system, information is needed


about both the materials and processes that will be used in the replacement. Similar
information is also needed for repairs to existing materials. The intent is always to both
meet the design requirements and also to improve the component if needed so future
replacements or repairs will not be required. Per nuclear regulations, this would
generally require the original construction code and design requirements be met as a
minimum. However, for some repairs, additional requirements may be added by design.
Although this handbook cannot be used as a substitute for design requirements, including
the requirements of the applicable Codes and Standards, it will provide the basic
information needed to plan a repair. In some cases, it will be necessary to verify
information given in the handbook, such as the composition information obtained from
material specifications, as there is a possibility that some information could change after
publication.

Once the component material is selected (see Material Selection in Chapter 2 of this
Section) or identified, information about the material is needed to begin to plan the
replacement or repair activity. This is the purpose of Section II, Materials, in this
handbook. The information may be obtained by taking the following steps:

1. Identify the materials to be replaced or repaired. In the case of replacement,


alternative materials may be considered in order to enhance the success of the
replacement. This may be based on similar replacements at this plant or other
plants or it may be based on selection of alternate materials chosen to address the
failure mode.
2. Look up the materials to be used in this handbook. In order to find the material
information, use Table II-1.1 (Section II, Chapter 1) to determine the location of the
material information in Section II. For example, SA 53 material is located in
Chapter 2 of Section II. After the Chapter location is determined, the specific
specification information will be found in numeric order in the Chapter. The type
or grade or the UNS number of the material will be needed in order to find the
material information.
3. Get the material information. After it is determined which Section II Chapter
contains the information, the general information for that chapter should be
reviewed and the material information found.
4. Determine the processes and methods to be used. Within the Chapter general
information, guidance is provided on cutting, gouging, grinding, surface preparation
and cleaning, preheating, welding, and PWHT. Some limitations and requirements
for the processes that would be used are discussed. This step may involve several
alternative choices on the processes selected (See Repair Considerations in Chapter
3 and Selection of Processes in Chapter 4 of this Section. The information
contained in Section III may also be helpful to address specific repair problems.).
This information should be reviewed for any special requirements related to the
repair or replacement application.
5. Determine if the processes are properly qualified for use or initiate qualification.
Processes and the personnel using them usually require qualification. This
requirement is obvious when the process is covered by Code requirements for
qualification such as welding and brazing (ASME Section IX1). It may be less
obvious when the process is not specifically covered by Code requirements but
meets the definition of Special Processes. (See Process Qualification in Chapter
5 of this Section.) Plant specific approaches must be followed for the selection of
the appropriate process procedures and personnel.
1
MATERIAL SELECTION
The information presented in Section II on materials may be required for either repairs or
replacements. The choice of base materials is only a consideration when a replacement is
being considered, not when the activity is the repair of existing materials. For repairs, the
component base materials do not change but the information needed about the materials
is still necessary for the success of the repair. Even with a repair, however, it may be
possible to select processes or welding filler materials that will enhance the overall
serviceability of the component. These alternatives are discussed in Section III of this
handbook.

Design requirements are based on the service anticipated for the component and are
based on a number of criteria. As a minimum, the same criteria should be used to
evaluate the design requirements for the repair/replacement activity. In addition, the
degradation or the failure, which is the reason for the repair/replacement, is an additional
input into the selection process. Components are not designed to fail or degrade beyond
expected corrosion or wear but when they do, an opportunity exists to improve on the
original design such that the same problem will not recur. This may involve a change in
the operating conditions, a change in the component design configuration, or a change in
the materials. This handbook does not address a change in the operating conditions or in
the component design configuration. When the choice of the component materials can be
done (the material choice by default is generally the existing material), the material
selected needs to meet or exceed the original design requirements. Following is a list of
material selection criteria that should be considered.

1. Material acceptability. The material is acceptable to the Code requirements. The


ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Codes require the use of base materials that are
acceptable to the Code. Any change in the base materials requires verification that
the material is acceptable to the Code of record. In nuclear applications, the Code
of record may be several different editions of B31.1 (Code for Power Piping)2,
B31.7 (Nuclear Power Piping)3, Section VIII (Pressure Vessels)4, and Section III
(Nuclear Power Plant Components)5. Materials that were not acceptable to the
Code of record may often be acceptable to later editions of the Codes. In this case,
ASME Section XI6 reconciliation to the original design requirements will need to
be done. The materials that are listed in Section II of this handbook are materials of
the specifications, type, or grades typically found in nuclear power plants. In all
cases where the material specifications have current editions, the information has
been extracted from those specification editions. In a few cases, materials that no
longer have current specifications are listed. In these cases, the information has
been extracted from the specification edition that is stated.

1-1
2. Allowable stress. The allowable stress for the material is available and meets the
design requirements. The allowable stress is normally assigned by the Code of
construction (B31.1, B31.7, Section III, or Section VIII), but in the case of the
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, Section IID contains the information. The
designer would use these allowable stresses as a basis for determining the design
parameters (e.g. minimum wall thickness). The original design per the Code of
record used allowable stresses assigned by that Code. It is possible that the
allowable stress has changed from the original materials. In this case, the ASME
Section XI reconciliation should consider this issue.
3. Service temperature. Some failures are related to the temperature during service.
Selection of a replacement material or determining if a material should be replaced
rather than repaired requires consideration of the temperature during service. This
includes both operation at elevated temperatures and operation at low temperatures.
Elevated temperatures should be taken as meaning temperatures where potential
degradation may occur (e.g. flow-assisted corrosion, stress corrosion cracking).
Low temperature concern may exist where the material may be subjected to sudden
load changes or impacts at temperatures where the material has poor toughness
(impact toughness).
4. Corrosion. Other than strength, this is one of the more important criteria for
selecting a material. There are many types of corrosion; each may present a
somewhat different basis for selecting the material (or in some cases the processes
used). An excellent reference for corrosion resistance is the EPRI Materials
Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary Applications, EPRI Document
Number 10030727.
5. Flow Assisted Corrosion (FAC) and Cavitation. While these are two different
mechanisms that cause degradation and failure, the selection of materials to deal
with them have some similarities. In both cases, replacement or repair materials
would typically have increasing alloy contents of chromium. FAC resistance is
significantly increased with as little as 0.5% of Cr in carbon steel. It is not normally
necessary to use materials with chromium contents greater than 2% to avoid FAC.
Higher percentages of chromium may be necessary to reduce the effects of
cavitation. In both cases, techniques that reduce the interruption of smooth flow
within the pipe or component is a valid part of the repair/replacement
considerations.
6. Other factors. There are several other factors which may have some bearing on the
selection of materials for repair/replacement. These may include life expectancy,
cost, ability to fabricate, and availability. In a nuclear plant, life expectancy is not
normally a major consideration for repair/replacement since the regulatory
requirements have the effect of not reducing the life expectancy below the original
design life for the affected component. This assumes that the decision to
repair/replace has already been made. Short term life expectancy can be a factor
during the evaluation of component degradation, particularly where a decision has
been made to delay permanent repair/replacement until a planned activity can be
implemented. Cost is a lesser factor except for major components since the cost of
outage time usually dwarfs the material costs. The ability to fabricate the material
can be significant, particularly where additional process qualification or extended

1-2
outage time is involved. This factor is similar to the Availability factor in that the
choice of the material may not be based on the ability of the material to meet the
design criteria but is rather a factor that could result in delays in getting the
repair/replacement completed.

Where repair of existing materials is the required activity, the base material is not being
selected; however other repair materials are. Often the repair process is welding so the
proper selection of the filler materials is critical. Similar factors are used to select the
repair materials as are used to select base materials. However, the factors of acceptability
of the specification and of the availability of the stress allowable do not apply directly.
When choosing a filler material, the normal approach is to select the filler material such
that the weldment strength and the chemical composition will not vary significantly
across the joint. In other words, the weld strength and corrosion resistance should be
essentially equal to the base material strength and corrosion resistance. Equivalence to
base material strength is the basis of qualification for strength joints. However, when the
weld is not a strength part of the component (e.g. corrosion resistant weld metal overlays
and hard surfacing), the chemical composition or the hardness may be the primary criteria
for the selection. For those cases where the base materials to be welded are not similar in
composition or strength, the filler material selection would consider transitional needs
between the materials. In all cases, welding qualification is still required since the
primary intent is to prove that the properties desired can be achieved.

1-3
2
REPAIR/REPACEMENT CONSIDERATIONS
The goal of any repair or replacement is to restore the component to a working condition
and to eliminate any need to do additional repairs in the future. There are occasions
however, where the repair should be considered temporary, allowing a more
comprehensive repair on a planned basis. In either case, safety remains the primary goal.
No repair or replacement can be considered adequate if all of the design considerations
necessary for safety are not met during the activity. As a result, it is necessary for the
repair activity to be closely connected to the design for the repair, and vice versa.

For those occasions where the repair is made on an emergency basis and would be
considered temporary (possibly until shown to be adequate on a permanent basis), this
handbook provides the basic information needed. These emergency repairs are normally
made only when public safety or plant integrity are at stake. In these cases, the
information needed is primarily the base material information provided in Section II,
which will aid the user in determining the requirements within existing process
procedures (e.g., preheat, PWHT, etc.).

The cause of the degradation or failure will likely be the most important factor in
effecting a permanent repair or replacement. For instance, if some load that would be
avoided in the future caused the problem, a repair or replacement which returns the
component to its original design condition would likely be acceptable. However, if the
causal problem cannot be avoided, some action should be considered to prevent future
degradation or failure. This action may be a change to the type of component, a change
to the design configuration, or a change to the material.

In order to determine the cause of degradation or failure, which is essential in planning an


effective repair, some analysis may be required before the repair activity destroys the
evidence. This analysis may be metallurgical or analytical (or both) so it is important to
preserve the failure until it is determined that enough information is available to
determine the cause.

The cause can generally be classified within three modes of failure, primary stress,
fatigue, or corrosion/erosion. Of these, primary stress failures are rare. Failures of this
type are almost always a result of errors in the materials used, inservice degradation of
the component, or operation significantly out of the intended design range.

2-1
Fatigue failures are significantly more common. While this type of failure is also the
result of operation outside the intended design range, it is often the result of cyclic loads
that were not anticipated during the design or of localized stress concentrations resulting
from fabrication discontinuities, residual stresses, or certain thermal conditions.

Corrosion or erosion failures may result from several different contributing factors.
These factors include the material, the environment, and the stress on the material. Each
of these factors is both interdependent and partially dependent on several associated
factors that will ultimately determine the potential for degradation or failure. As stated in
the Chapter 2 of this Section, Material Selection, an excellent reference for corrosion
resistance is the EPRI Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary
Applications8. Additional information is also available in Chapter 6 of this Section.

The first consideration for any repair activity is to determine if the component should be
repaired or replaced. There are a number of factors that should be included in this
decision. As stated above, replacement in kind may not be an acceptable solution on a
permanent basis if the causal problem cannot be eliminated. However, if the degradation
or failure is progressive (i.e., occurring over a period of time), it may be considered a
time limited solution. Replacements with components that have enhanced characteristics
(material properties, corrosion resistance, etc.) may be required to mitigate the causal
problem.

Repairs may also be either in kind or enhanced to prevent future problems. In kind
repairs just return the component to the original design condition. This may be the
replacement of degraded material (the material dimensions could be changed due the
causal problem itself or due to the removal of the degraded or failed material) with
material essentially equivalent to the base material (i.e., by the addition of weld metal).
Enhanced repairs are intended to improve the material condition such that the causal
problem is mitigated.

2-2
3
SELECTION OF PROCESSES
The selection of processes for the repair/replacement activity must have the results as the
primary consideration. The intended result is a safe and working product, meeting the
design requirements. The processes used to implement the repair/replacement are
integral to the successful result.

Repair/replacement processes often are also Special Processes. If the process is a


Special Process, qualification is a required consideration per Criterion IX of 10 CFR
50, Appendix B, Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power Plants and Fuel
Reprocessing Plants9. Examples of Special Processes are given in Appendix B
Criterion IX ( special processes, including welding, heat treating, and nondestructive
testing.) but is better defined in the Introduction of ASME NQA-1-200010, as follows:

special process: a process, the results of which are highly dependent on the control of
the process or the skill of the operators, or both, and in which the specified quality cannot
be readily determined by inspection or test of the product.

Given the requirement to control special processes, serious consideration must be given
to qualify the procedure to be used and/or the people that will be used to perform the
procedure. This process is quite well defined for processes such as welding, brazing, and
nondestructive examination since the ASME has reference codes covering the methods
and requirements for qualification. It is not as well defined for special processes that are
not so specifically covered, such as plating, protective coatings, chemical treatments, etc.
The engineers and planners responsible for the use of special processes need to evaluate
if the quality resulting from the process or the performance of the process cannot be
readily determined by inspection or test. If the definition of special processes is met,
qualification of the process and the personnel must be considered.

Repairs are generally done using welding processes. The selection of the proper welding
process is often done by personnel specifically responsible for the application of the
Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS). However the repair plan should take into
consideration a number of issues that would affect the process selection. Some of these
factors are:

Materials Some materials are not readily welded with some processes (may be due to
the degree of shielding required, availability of filler materials, etc.). However most of the
processes covered in ASME Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications may be
considered. If the materials have been welded successfully before, they can most likely

3-1
be welded again but the success will depend on the proper selection of the processes,
techniques, WPSs, and welder skills.
Position Processes such as submerged arc welding (SAW), which may have been used
in the original construction, cannot be used in some positions, limiting their use in field
applications.
Quality While quality is always a criteria, some processes such as Gas Tungsten Arc
Welding (GTAW) make it easier to obtain higher quality welds than other processes,
particularly in the manual mode of application.
Accessibility The issues of accessibility, environmental contamination, high radiation
fields, or cumbersome personnel protection equipment may make automatic or machine
processes more attractive since the ability of the welder to perform the weld is a
significant consideration. If the manual or semiautomatic mode of application is used, the
process selection needs to include consideration of the welders access to the joint.
Production For those repairs or replacements that involve a significant amount of
deposited weld metal, higher deposition rate processes should be considered. This may
be a choice of automatic or machine variations on processes such as GTAW, FCAW, or
GMAW, or of semiautomatic processes such as FCAW or GMAW.
WPS Availability Since repair applications are often short term, immediate need issues,
and the process chosen may be simply made based on what WPSs are available for the
required material.
Personnel Qualification Similar to the process selection based on WPS availability, the
process may also be chosen based on the availability of qualified personnel.

In some situations, brazing may be the appropriate repair process. This would most
generally be true for copper alloy tubing or piping where the initial joining method was
brazing.

Other processes may also be utilized during repair and replacement activities. These
processes may be used to modify the characteristics of the materials (such as heat
treatment or shot peening) or they may be used to make the repair possible (such as
freeze seals). Section III should be referenced to gain thoughts on how these processes
(or various techniques on the processes) could be used to make the repair or replacement
more efficient and of better quality.

3-2
4
PROCESS QUALIFICATION
As discussed in Chapter 4, special processes require qualification of the procedure
and/or the personnel performing the process in order to provide assurance that the process
will yield successful results. Most of the processes used during the performance of
repairs or the installation of replacements are special processes. Therefore, when
considering these processes, it is also necessary to consider the qualification of them.

Welding and Brazing

All of the codes which govern the design and fabrication of pressure containing systems
and components within a nuclear power plant require welding and brazing qualification
in accordance with ASME Section IX11. The emphasis in this code is that procedures are
qualified to prove that adequate properties will be achieved in the weldment. These
properties are intended to be essentially equivalent to the properties of the base materials
being welded.

In order to qualify a welding or brazing procedure, a sample weldment or brazement is


made between similar materials (similar materials may be defined as the group of
materials with the same P No.) and destructively tested to confirm that the weldment has
the required properties. The tests required when strength is a criterion are always tensile
tests and bend tests, but impact tests may also be required if so stated in the construction
code. The parameters used during the welding of the sample are recorded per the
requirements of Section IX. Some of these parameters control the end properties of the
weldment (essential variables) and may not be changed without requalification. There
are also required parts of the welding procedure which may not appreciably affect the
properties of the weldment but which are important for the welder or brazer to know
(nonessential variables).

There are significant additional variables to include in the qualification (supplementary


essential variables) if the material is required by the applicable construction code to pass
certain toughness requirements. This will require the application of the lowest service
temperature to the additional toughness tests that will be required during the WPS
qualification.

4-1
Generally, each organization is required to qualify their welding or brazing procedures.
There are exceptions to this rule. Section XI12 and B31.113 both have rules for transfer of
WPSs and BPSs. In addition, Section IX also allows the use of the American Welding
Societys Standard Welding Procedures14. The individual codes need to be followed in
order to accept these procedures in lieu of qualifying the procedures.

Performance qualification is also a requirement of Section IX. Again a sample weldment


or brazement is made but in this case there are significantly fewer variables to follow that
would require requalification. The variables for performance qualification per Section IX
are those variables which have been determined to be a factor in the ability of the welder
or brazer to make the weld or brazed joint, following the WPS or BPS. Each
organization is required to qualify their personnel. Again, however, there are exceptions
to this rule in Section XI and B31.1.

Nondestructive Examination

All of the codes which govern the design and fabrication of pressure containing systems
and components within a nuclear power plant require nondestructive examination (NDE)
be done using the methods described in ASME Section V, Nondestructive Examination15.
Section V contains specific Articles covering the various typical NDE methods, such as
visual examination, radiography, ultrasonic testing, penetrant testing, magnetic particle
testing, eddy current testing, and acoustic emission examination. These articles specify
the requirement for written procedures. They also detail the requirements for
qualification of the method through demonstration, although a few of the methods do not
require additional demonstration if the examination is done within the limits of the
techniques described. In some cases, the referencing code also details additional
requirements for the qualification of examination procedures.

The referencing codes also contain requirements for the qualification and certification of
NDE personnel. Generally, these codes reference the American Society of
Nondestructive Testing (ASNT) documents for the requirements. Two different
documents are referenced. One, ASNT SNT-TC-1A, Personnel Qualification and
Certification in Nondestructive Testing16, is a guideline rather than a Standard. However,
until recently, this was the primary document for guidance on personnel NDE
qualification. It required a written program by the employer of the NDE personnel,
covering issues such as education and experience, visual acuity, and knowledge of the
method. In order to demonstrate that knowledge, the personnel are required to take and
pass a written examination on the method. Three levels of personnel qualification were
allowed:

o Level I allowed the personnel so designated to perform NDE under the supervision of a
higher level

4-2
o Level II allowed the personnel to perform and interpret the results of the examination
o Level III allowed the personnel to do the same as the Level II but also was considered to
be a higher authority that could overrule the Level II and could administer the written
examinations of Levels I & II.

The second document, ASNT CP-189, ASNT Standard for Qualification and
Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel17 is an American National Standard. It
is similar to the SNT-TC-1A document except that it becomes the requirement rather than
a guideline (for establishing the requirement). The certification of the Level III is also
more tightly controlled through an examination administered by the ASNT. ASNT SNT-
TC-1A allowed the Level III to be assigned by the employer based on education and
experience.

Heat Treatment

Heat treatment other than PWHT is not often used during repair activities but may be
required during the manufacturing of replacement components. When this heat treatment
occurs, established practices required by material specifications (see the specific material
information in Section II) are usually the requirement. These practices have been
qualified during the material development and have become requirements of the material
specifications. Heat treatment that is done outside of the material specification (for
instance heat treatment after hot bending or forming) or PWHT need to be qualified to
demonstrate that the required properties of the material are achieved. In the case of
PWHT, this is done as part of the welding procedure qualification described above.

Protective Coatings18

In a nuclear power plant, as in any industrial facility, protective coatings are needed to
minimize corrosion of piping and equipment. Protective coatings also serve an important
role in decontaminating equipment in those areas where airborne or waterborne
radioactive materials could come in contact with coated surfaces.

Unfortunately, the application of protective coatings has not always been controlled as
well as it should be, resulting in significant rework and workarounds. In nuclear power
plants which depend on the containment sumps for emergency core cooling, a significant
amount of poorly applied coatings could peel and impede flow through the sump. This
has been identified as a generic safety issue within the industry.

Protective coating processes should be considered a special process and therefore


process qualification and personnel qualification must be considered. A number of
national standards have been developed19 20 21 which should be utilized for coating

4-3
system and personnel qualification. In addition, as with other special processes, coatings
inspectors should be trained and qualified to perform inspection activities22.

Other Special Processes

A demonstration through qualification tests is required for other processes that meet the
definition of special processes will be done successfully. If a process requires
qualification, a sample is made and some method of determining the success of the
application is applied. This becomes the procedure qualification. In some cases, special
process procedure qualification is done by the organization that developed the process
rather than each user organization. The user organization would typically review the
process and the qualification to determine if the special process can be considered to be
qualified.

In cases where the special process is to be used exactly as it was qualified, the procedure
would not offer variables to be used. Where some significant differences exist, decisions
must be made regarding which variables are important to the process quality
requirements. These variables in effect become essential to the process and additional
qualification may be required if they are to be changed.

Personnel then need to demonstrate that they are capable of performing the process. The
performance tests need only be done if the personnel require a level of skill in using the
process. For instance, the use of automatic equipment may not require performance
qualification (when the equipment operator has no real input into the process) but the
process procedure may still need to be qualified. If required, the personnel qualification
would be done in a manner similar to the procedure qualification. A sample would be
prepared and then tested in some manner that would verify that the process procedure
was used successfully. Note that welding operators using automatic equipment are still
required to be qualified per the rules of ASME Section IX.

Similar to the procedure qualification requirements, the variables which would affect the
ability to use the process and the procedure developed become essential when the
personnel demonstrate their ability. A change in these ability factors would result in a
need to demonstrate them through additional performance qualification. Good examples
of this are the additional restrictions placed on personnel that must wear very restrictive
anti-contamination gear or when there are severe limitations of access during the
performance of the process.

4-4
5
FAILURE MECHANISMS
The Design Codes address the principal failure mechanisms in pressure components; that
is , failure due to rupture or collapse and failure due to fatigue. The choice of materials
or processes to resist other failure mechanisms, such as material degradation, is left to the
engineer. In planning for repair or replacement of a failed component, it is very
important to determine the cause of failure. The resulting repair/replacement should be
planned to preclude the same failure mechanism from reoccurring or to introduce other
failure mechanisms. Therefore any repair plan required as a result of materials or process
related failures must also include consideration of choices intended to resist such failures.
Following are descriptions of failure mechanisms:

PRIMARY PRESSURE FAILURE

Failures of components as a result of pressure alone are extremely rare. However,


pressure may be the final cause of failure after other problems have caused a significant
weakening of the material. If the material selection and design is done adequately, and
the components are fabricated as designed, failures due to pressure alone should not
occur.

FATIGUE

Fatigue is a much more common failure mode in power plants. This type of failure is the
result of cyclic stresses resulting from plant operation (either thermal or mechanical).
The failures are most likely to occur at stress concentrations resulting from physical
discontinuities (flaws, cross section changes, or changes in direction) or changes in the
material properties. Welds are often related to fatigue failures as they offer both physical
and metallurgical discontinuities in the components. Fatigue is a common mode of
failure in unreinforced fabricated tees and socket welds.

Fatigue failures can be minimized by thoughtful anticipation and analysis of potential


cyclic loads and by making correct choices in layout and support design, filler metal
selection, postweld heat treatment, joint design, weld quality, and weld contours. Where
a source of vibration exists (e.g., pumps), resonant frequencies should be avoided.
Fatigue failures may also be accelerated by corrosion mechanisms.

5-1
PRIMARY LOAD FAILURES

Primary load failures rarely occur but may be the result of missing supports where the
weight load is not strain limited. Failures of this type would more frequently occur in the
supports.

WATER HAMMER, STEAM HAMMER, AND SLUGGING FAILURES

Water hammer, steam hammer, and slugging can result in either fatigue or catastrophic
failures. These failures are the result of design or operational problems and are normally
caused23 by:
o Valve operation
o Pump start-up or pump power failure
o Auto-oscillation of valves or hydraulic components
o Collapse of vapor pockets

FORMS OF CORROSION

Fontana and Greene24 describe several forms of corrosion, many of which are found to
occur in nuclear power plants. These forms of corrosion may appear as a single corrosion
factor or as a number of corrosion forms working in concert. Following is a brief
description of these forms of corrosion:

Uniform Attack

Uniform attack is characterized by chemical or electrochemical attack. It is generally


avoided in power plant applications by the selection of materials that are appropriate for
the environment or medium. However, this still occurs due to leaks or errors that result
in an unexpected corrosive environment for certain materials. In nuclear plants, probably
the most visible situation where this may occur is where leaks of borated water have
come in contact with carbon or low alloy steels.

Galvanic Corrosion

Galvanic corrosion is the result of an electrochemical potential between two connected


dissimilar metals in the presence of an electrolyte. In essence, this is a battery. The
metal with the lower electrode potential is the anode and becomes less resistant to
corrosion; conversely the metal with the higher electrode potential is the cathode and
becomes more resistant to corrosion. While it is possible that galvanic corrosion could be

5-2
the primary corrosion problem, it is often an accelerating mechanism, causing corrosion
to occur more rapidly than would normally be expected.

Crevice Corrosion

This form of corrosion may result when the access to a minor corrosion site is severely
restricted, such that a stagnant zone is created at that site. This causes a local acceleration
of the corrosion rate due to increasing concentrations or depletions of dissolved salts,
metal ions, oxygen, or other gases25. Metals which depend on oxide films or passive
layers for corrosion resistance are particularly susceptible to crevice corrosion.

Pitting

Pitting is similar to crevice corrosion in that a rapidly acceleration of the corrosion rate
occurs in a localized area. In the case of pitting however, the initiation mechanism
occurs on the surface of a metal rather than in a crevice. For this reason, the likely
locations for pitting to occur are in components where low flow conditions exist. Pits
also tend to occur on horizontal surfaces. The initiation of pits seems to occur fairly
randomly, but once started can progress rapidly. Pitting corrosion occurs when the
corrosive solution or temperatures exist between the limits of not being corrosive to the
existence of general corrosion.

Intergranular Corrosion

The grain boundaries of metals are more reactive (i.e. less corrosion resistant) than the
material within the grain itself. However, this usually has little consequence since the
difference is small. However, when the metal has impurities that collect at the grain
boundaries or when alloying elements are depleted at the grain boundaries, the result may
be increased reactivity. The most common situation in nuclear plants that causes this
type of corrosion is the sensitization of austenitic stainless steels. Sensitization is the
depletion of chromium near the grain boundaries due to the formation of Cr23C6. This
situation may cause rapid corrosion at the grain boundaries, resulting in the loss of grains
of the material.

Stress Corrosion

The susceptibility of a metal to stress corrosion cracking is traditionally based on three


factors, material susceptibility, environment, and stress. Without any of the three factors,
stress corrosion cracking will not occur. However, each of these factors includes several

5-3
sub-factors that will ultimately determine the metals susceptibility to this corrosion
mechanism. Certainly stress must be tensile rather than compressive. However the
source of the stress may be residual stresses from welding, grinding, machining, or cold
forming or may be operational stresses. The material susceptibility factors include the
specific alloy and structure of the metal as well as factors such as sensitization. The
environment includes the temperatures, the presence of impurities such as chlorides,
sulfides, fluorides, and dissolved oxygen, and the flow at the affected surface.

Flow Assisted Corrosion (FAC)

FAC is a well-known mechanism for failure in nuclear plants. Factors which influence
the rate of FAC include the medium and the local flow rate of the medium. Medium
factors include whether the contents of the component is single phase or two phase, its
oxygen content, its pH, the temperature, and the presence of solids. The factors which
influence the local flow rate include not only the net flow rate in the component, but also
the quite local effects of turbulent flow. The turbulent flow may be caused by
configurations causing changes in direction, cross section, or surface irregularities.

Microbiologically Induced Corrosion (MIC)

Microbiological organisms can attack ferrous materials (including austenitic stainless


steels), copper alloys, and aluminum alloys. There are two forms of microbiologically
induced corrosion (MIC), anaerobic and aerobic26. In typical power plant applications,
aerobic MIC can affect service and cooling water systems containing natural, essentially
untreated water containing the culprit species of organisms27. MIC is characterized by
deposits under which aggressive acidic environments are created by the organisms. In
addition to an enabling water source, MIC is promoted by the absence of chlorination
practices, stagnant or low flow conditions, crevices, or preexisting corrosion deposits28.

OTHER FAILURE MECHANISMS

Hydrogen Cracking

Hydrogen cracking is also known as cold cracking, delayed cracking, or underbead


cracking, all relating to the same cause, the existence of hydrogen in solution in high
temperature weld metal that is subsequently forced out of solution upon cooling.

Hydrogen cracking as a result of welding hardenable materials can occur when the
following factors are present29:

5-4
o Hydrogen is present to a sufficient degree
o Tensile stresses act on the weld
o A susceptible heat affected zone (HAZ) microstructure is present
o A low temperature is reached

Welding on hardenable materials often creates the required tensile stresses (in the form of
residual stresses) and the susceptible HAZ microstructure when left in the as-welded
condition (or prior to PWHT). The material may also reach the necessary low
temperatures at ambient conditions. The avoidance of hydrogen cracking therefore
depends on either eliminating the source of sufficient hydrogen or preventing the other
factors from reaching threshold conditions prior to any cracking occurring.

The presence of hydrogen in the weld is not often the result of atmospheric conditions but
rather from the presence of moisture in the weld area or in the flux of flux bearing
welding processes. The development of moisture resistant fluxes has reduced (but not
eliminated) the likelihood of threshold moisture. The use of rod and flux heating ovens
and the control of electrodes exposed to atmosphere before use are the most common
ways of controlling the existence of moisture in the fluxes. As the hardenability of the
base materials increases, the use of preheat will reduce the effect of the weld cooling rate
on the hardness. Preheat will also allow hydrogen to diffuse out of the base materials
more rapidly. However, if the preheat is not maintained after welding, the possibility of
hydrogen cracking may still exist. For this reason, on high hardenability materials, the
preheat may be maintained (hydrogen cracking is not likely at temperatures above 300F
(150C)30) until any required PWHT. Alternatively, the weldment may be post heated for
an adequate time (1-2 hours) at a temperature of 500-800F (250-500C) before it is
allowed to cool to ambient temperatures. (The latter approach is called a hydrogen bake-
out.) More sophisticated approaches may be used to avoid hydrogen cracking based on
an analysis of moisture content in the flux, the hardenability (as determined by the carbon
equivalent, see Chapters 2 through 6 of Section II), the preheat temperature, and the
preheat maintenance.

Solidification Cracking (Hot Cracking)

Solidification cracking is the result of rapid thermal shrinkage during welding where the
semi-solid metal is unable to accommodate the associated strain31. The presence of
certain alloying elements exacerbates the potential for this type of cracking. Alloying
elements such as phosphorus and sulfur are particular elements that are kept low in
material specifications in order to reduce solidification cracking. In nickel-based alloys,
an additional element that must be controlled is boron. It is critical that additional
sources of these elements are not added to the weld zone through the existence of foreign
materials (such as sulfur-containing machining oil).

Another mechanism for solidification cracking is the result of poor weld joint design,
where the centerline of highly restrained welds may be susceptible.

5-5
Fouling

Fouling is not a failure mechanism in itself but is rather a degradation of the system that
can result in operational problems or contribute to failures by other mechanisms. On a
macro basis, fouling resulting from debris or significant accumulation of organisms such
as zebra mussels can block flow in service water systems. Micro fouling creates sites
where MIC could result.

5-6
SECTION II MATERIALS
6
GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND
GROUPINGS

Table II-1.1 provides a listing of information on those materials that are commonly used in the
construction of nuclear power plants. The approach is to first start with the material specification
and type or grade. The table is organized such that the location of the material information is
found merely by locating the material using this information and the Chapter location will be
designated. Table II-1.1 also includes the ASME Section IX P Numbers (or S Numbers) and the
UNS (Uniform Numbering System) Number for the material. Product specifications will be
included but the material information will be for the base materials from which the product is
made.

Following are the steps needed to locate the material information:

1. Establish the materials to be repaired or replaced. This information is typically found on


archival drawings, specifications, line lists, code name plates, or vendor information. Some
plants may have component histories that contain this information.
2. Once the material has been identified to an ASME, ASTM, or other material specification,
look it up in Table II-1.1 and determine the Chapter containing the material information.
3. Within the applicable Chapter, find the material information listed in numeric order of the
specification.

Administrative Note: The following references were used to obtain the information contained in this section:

1. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
32,33,34

2. Code for Power Piping, American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)35


3. Materials Index, Practical Guide to ASME Section II, Casti Publishing, Inc.36
4. Welding Handbook, Volume 4, Part 2, Materials and Applications, American Welding
Society37
5. Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary Applications, Final Report
1003072, Electric Power Research Institute, 200138
6. Metals and Alloys in the Unified Numbering System, Society of Automotive Engineers
(SAE) and American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), 8th Edition39
7. ASM Handbooks, Volume 3, Phase Diagrams, American Society of Metals40
8. Material Specifications, American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)41

6-1
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SA 36 -- II-2 1 1 K02600
SA 53 Type E, Gr. A II-2 1 1 K02504
SA 53 Type S, Gr. A II-2 1 1 K02504
SA 53 Type E, Gr. B II-2 1 1 K03005
SA 53 Type S, Gr. B II-2 1 1 K03005
SA 53 Type F II-2 1 1 --
SA 105 -- II-2 1 2 K03504
SA 106 A II-2 1 1 K02501
SA 106 B II-2 1 1 K03006
SA 106 C II-2 1 2 K03501
SA 134 SA283 Gr. C II-2 1 1 K02401
SA 155 (1) KC55 Cl 1 II-2 1 1 K02001
SA 155 (1) KC60 Cl 1 II-2 1 1 K02401
SA 155 (1) KC65 Cl 1 II-2 1 1 K02800
SA 155 (1) KC70 Cl 1 II-2 1 2 K03101
SA 155 (1) KC70 Cl 2 II-2 1 2 K03101
SA 155 (1) KCF70 Cl1 II-2 1 2 K02700
SA 155 (1) KCF70 Cl2 II-2 1 2 K02700
SA 179 -- II-2 1 1 K01200
SA 181 Class 60 II-2 1 1 K03502
SA 181 Class 70 II-2 1 2 K03502
SA 182 Gr. F5 II-5 5B 1 K41545
SA 182 Gr. F9 II-5 5B 1 K90941
SA 182 Gr. F11, Cl. 1 II-4 4 1 K11597
SA 182 Gr. F22, Cl. 1 II-5 5A 1 K21590
SA 182 F50 II-10 10H 1 S31200
SA 182 F51 II-10 10H 1 S31803 (5)
SA 182 F91 II-5 5B 2 K91560
SA 182 F304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 182 F304L II-7 8 1 S30403
SA 182 F316 II-7 8 1 S31600

6-2
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SA 182 F316L II-7 8 1 S31603
SA 182 F347 II-7 8 1 S34700
SA 212 (1) Gr. A II-2 1 -- --
SA 212 (1) Gr. B II-2 1 -- --
SA 213 TP304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 213 TP304L II-7 8 1 S30403
SA 213 TP316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 213 TP316L II-7 8 1 S31603
SA 216 WCB II-2 1 2 J03002
SA 216 WCC II-2 1 2 J02503
SA 217 C5 II-5 5B 1 J42045
SA 217 C12 II-5 5B 1 J82090
SA 217 WC5 II-4 4 1 J22000
SA 217 WC9 II-5 5A 1 J21890
SA 234 (1) WPA II-2 1 1 Various
SA 234 WPB/WPBW II-2 1 1 K03006
SA 234 WPC/WPCW II-2 1 2 K03501
SA 234 WP1 II-3 3 1 K12821
SA 234 WP5 II-5 5B 1 K41545
SA 234 WP9 II-5 5B 1 S50400
SA 234 WP11, Cl. 1 II-4 4 1 --
SA 234 WP11 Cl 2 II-4 4 (6) 1 --
SA 234 WP12 Cl 1 II-4 4 1 K12062
SA 234 WP12 Cl 2 II-4 4 (4) 1 K12062
SA 234 WP22 Cl 1 II-5 5A 1 K21590
SA 234 WP22 Cl 3 II-5 5A (4) 1 K21590
SA 234 WP91 II-5 5B 2 K90901 (5)
SA 240 Type 304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 240 Type 304L II-7 8 1 S30403
SA 240 Type 316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 240 Type 316L II-7 8 1 S31603
SA 240 Type 347 II-7 8 1 S34700

6-3
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
269
A TP304 II-7 S8 1 S30400
(1)(2)
269
A TP316 II-7 S8 1 S31600
(1)(2)
276
A 304 II-7 S8 1 S30400
(1)(2)
276
A 304L II-7 S8 1 S30403
(1)(2)
276
A 316 II-7 S8 1 S31600
(1)(2)
276
A 316L II-7 S8 1 S31603
(1)(2)
SA 283 C II-2 1 1 K02401
SA 285 A II-2 1 1 K01700
SA 285 B II-2 1 1 K02200
SA 285 C II-2 1 1 K02801
SA 302 B II-3 3 3 K12022
SA 312 TP304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 312 TP304L II-7 8 1 S30403
SA 312 TP316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 312 TP316L II-7 8 1 S31603
SA 312 TP317L II-7 8 1 S31703
SA 312 TP347 II-7 8 1 S34700
SA 333 6 II-2 1 1 K03006
SA 333 9 II-9 9A 1 K22035
SA 335 P5 II-5 5B 1 K41545
SA 335 P9 II-5 5B 1 S50400
SA 335 P11 II-4 4 1 K11597
SA 335 P22 II-5 5A 1 K21590
SA 335 P91 II-5 5B 2 K91560
SA 350 LF1 II-2 1 1 K03009
SA 350 LF2 II-2 1 2 K03011
SA 350 LF3 II-9 9B 1 K32025
SA 351 CD4MCu II-10 10H 1 J93370 (5)
SA 351 CE8MN II-10 10H 1 J93345 (5)

6-4
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SA 351 CF3 II-7 8 1 J92500
SA 351 CF3A II-7 8 1 J92500
SA 351 CF3MA II-7 8 (4) 1 J92800
SA 351 CF3M II-7 8 1 J92800
SA 351 CF8 II-7 8 1 J92600
SA 351 CF8A II-7 8 1 J92600
SA 351 CF8M II-7 8 1 J92900
SA 351 CN3MN II-8 45 -- J94651 (5)
SA 358 304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 358 304L II-7 8 1 S30403 (5)
SA 358 316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 358 316L II-7 8 1 S31603 (5)
SA 358 347 II-7 8 1 S34700
SA 376 TP304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 376 TP304LN II-7 8 1 S30453 (5)
SA 376 TP316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 376 TP316LN II-7 8 1 S31653 (5)
SA 376 TP321 II-7 8 1 S32100
SA 376 TP347 II-7 8 1 S34700
WP304/
SA 403 II-7 8 1 S30400
WP304W
WP304L/
SA 403 II-7 8 1 S30403
WP304LW
WP316/
SA 403 II-7 8 1 S31600
WP316W
WP316L/
SA 403 II-7 8 1 S31603
WP316LW
SA 403 WP347 II-7 8 1 S34700
SA 420 WPL6 II-2 1 1 K03006 (5)
SA 451 CPF3 II-7 8 1 J92500
SA 451 CPF3A II-7 8 1 J92500
SA 451 CPF3M II-7 8 1 J92800
SA 451 CPF8 II-7 8 1 J92600

6-5
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SA 451 CPF8A II-7 8 1 J92600
SA 451 CPF8M II-7 8 1 J92900
SA 479 304 II-7 8 1 S30400
SA 479 304L II-7 8 1 S30403
SA 479 316 II-7 8 1 S31600
SA 479 316L II-7 8 1 S31603
SA 479 410 II-6 6 1 S41000
SA 508 1 II-2 1 2 K13502
SA 508 2, Cl. 1 II-3 3 3 K12766
SA 508 2, Cl. 2 II-3 3 3 K12766
SA 508 3, Cl. 1 II-3 3 3 K12042
SA 515 (1) 55 II-2 1 1 K02001
SA 515 60 II-2 1 1 K02401
SA 515 65 II-2 1 1 K02800
SA 515 70 II-2 1 2 K03101
SA 516 55 II-2 1 1 K01800
SA 516 60 II-2 1 1 K02100
SA 516 65 II-2 1 1 K02403
SA 516 70 II-2 1 2 K02700
SA 533 Type A, Cl.1 II-3 3 3 K12521
SA 533 Type A, Cl.2 II-3 3 3 K12521
SA 533 Type B, Cl.1 II-3 3 3 K12539
SA 537 Cl. 1 II-2 1 2 K12437
SA 671 CC70 Class 32 II-2 1 2 K02700 (5)
SA 672 B70 Class 20 & 22 II-2 1 2 K03101 (5)
SA 691 CMSH-70 II-2 1 2 K12437 (5)
SA 789 S31200 II-10 10H 1 S31200
SA 789 S31260 II-10 10H 1 S31260
SA 789 S31500 II-10 10H 1 S31500
SA 789 S31803 II-10 10H 1 S31803
SA 789 S32304 II-10 10H 1 S32304
SA 789 S32550 II-10 10H 1 S32550

6-6
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SA 789 S32750 II-10 10H 1 S32750
SA 789 S32900 II-10 10H 1 S32900
SA 789 S32950 II-10 10H 1 S32950
SA 790 S31200 II-10 10H 1 S31200
SA 790 S31260 II-10 10H 1 S31260
SA 790 S31500 II-10 10H 1 S31500
SA 790 S31803 II-10 10H 1 S31803
SA 790 S32304 II-10 10H 1 S32304
SA 790 S32550 II-10 10H 1 S32550
SA 790 S32750 II-10 10H 1 S32750
SA 790 S32900 II-10 10H 1 S32900
SA 790 S32950 II-10 10H 1 S32950
SA 815 S31803 II-10 10H 1 S31803
SB 42 C10200 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C10200
SB 42 C12000 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C12000
SB 42 C12200 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C12200
SB 61 -- II-11 107 (3) -- C92200
SB 62 -- II-11 107 (3) -- C83600
B 68 (1)(2) C10200 II-11 S31/S107 (3) -- C10200
B 68 (1)(2) C12000 II-11 S31/S107 (3) -- C12000
B 68 (1)(2) C12200 II-11 S31/S107 (3) -- C12200
SB 75 C10200 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C10200
SB 75 C12000 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C12000
SB 75 C12200 II-11 31/107 (3) -- C12200
B 88 (1)(2) C12200 II-11 S31/S107 (3) -- C12200
SB 98 C65100 II-11 33/107 (3) -- C65100
SB 98 C65500 II-11 33/107 (3) -- C65500
SB 98 C66100 II-11 33/107 (3) -- C66100
SB 165 -- II-8 42 -- N04400
280
B C12200 II-11 S31/S107 (3) -- C12200
(2)(5)
SB 283 C11000 II-11 31/107 (3) (4) -- C11000

6-7
Table II-1.1 GENERAL MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS AND GROUPINGS

Material Material ASME ASME UNS


Specification Information Section IX Section IX Number
Type or Grade
Number42 43 Chapter P/S-Number Group No. (A)
SB 283 C37700 II-11 S107 (3) -- C37700
SB 283 C46400 II-11 32/107 (3) (4) -- C46400
SB 283 C65500 II-11 33/107 (3) (4) -- C65500
SB 283 C67500 II-11 S32/S107 (3) -- C67500
SB 366 WP20CB II-8 45 -- N08020
SB 423 N08825 II-8 45 -- N08825
SB 444 N06625 II-8 43 -- N06625
SB 462 N08367 II-8 45 -- N08367
SB 464 N08020 II-8 45 -- N08020
SB 464 N08024 II-8 45 -- N08024
SB 464 N08026 II-8 45 -- N08026
SB 675 N08367 II-8 45 -- N08367
SB 690 N08367 II-8 45 -- N08367
Notes:
(A) UNS Nos. derived from UNS source book, 8th Edition.
(1) Discontinued Specification or material - data obtained from last available edition of ASME or ASTM
material specifications. ASME or ASTM specification edition used for reference indicated on material page.
(2) May be used in B31.1 applications only
(3) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.
(4) P No. & Group No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1
(5) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.
(6) P No. assigned per ASME B31.1, Appenndix A. Welding under qualifications with this P No. applicable
to B31.1 fabrications only.

6-8
7
CARBON STEELS (P NO. 1)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that apply to
specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of the material
specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific requirements that apply to these
materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of the scope of this information, such as the
requirements of the design, the welding procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process
procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Carbon steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Fuel gas torch
Plasma torch
Water jet

When carbon steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, a light grinding may be required to
remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. Preheat should be considered
when thermal cutting is used on higher strength carbon steels. If the thermally shaped or cut surface
is to be left without further operations, the oxidized surface layer should be totally removed and
some sub-surface material may also require removal.

Welding:
Carbon steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding processes used for repair
are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW,
and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high volume repairs, or to address specific welding
issues. The selection of the process is based on a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

7-1
The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and chemical
composition. Carbon steels in the P No. 1 category have a wide range of strengths so the filler metal
selection may also cover a wide range. The welding procedure specification (WPS) being used
should in general provide direction on the filler metal to be used but caution is advised since the
filler metal used for the WPS qualification may be a significantly lower strength than needed for the
materials being welded.

The requirements for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) vary widely within the different
codes. These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables. Carbon steels should not be welded when cold so a minimum
preheat of 50F (10C) is often required. Elevated preheats of 175F (80C) may be required for
thicker or higher carbon content materials. PWHT is a much more complicated issue as a result of
widely varying code requirements. If the material being welded is less than in. (19 mm) at the
weld, PWHT will not be required by the codes. Above that thickness, varying code rules may allow
the exemption of PWHT based on the rules that apply within the specific code being followed. The
thickness that applies may be the weld thickness (defined in the specific code) or the material
thickness (either the thinner or the thicker of the materials being welded, depending on the specific
code). Other factors such as joint type and preheat (may be a different temperature than the preheat
requirement) also may affect the need to perform PWHT. However, the requirements of the WPS
must also be followed which may result in the need to do preheat and/or PWHT even if the code of
record does not require it.

Service Precautions:
All carbon steels are susceptible to boric acid corrosion and must be protected from exposure to
borated water solutions. Carbon steels are also susceptible to rusting (oxidation) when directly
exposed to moist environments. Protective coatings or other protective measures may be required to
avoid these corrosion problems. Carbon steels also do not perform well in environments determined
to be susceptible to flow assisted corrosion or to cavitation.

Carbon Equivalent:
The generally accepted carbon equivalent (CE) equation by the ASME Codes is:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15

However, if the analysis of all of the elements is not available, the CE may be determined by using
0.1 for the last two terms of the equation, resulting in the CE equation:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + 0.1

These equations were used when calculating the CE for the materials contained in Section II. The
CE calculated when the specification did not contain limits on Cr, Mo, V, Ni, or Cu therefore used
the 0.1 adder. These CE were also calculated using the maximum limit of the elements listed.
Therefore the CE values listed for the materials in Section II are extremely conservative compared
with a CE calculated using actual values. If a mill test report or a chemical analysis of the actual

7-2
material is available, the calculated CE would likely be much lower. A suggested reference for the
comparison between the calculated maximum CE and the CE calculated using actual values is EPRI
Report 1006799, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding44.

Outside of special applications such as underwater welding, the use of carbon equivalents in the
ASME Codes is generally limited but may be very useful in determining the appropriate preheats
when the preheat temperature is not mandated by the applicable Code. It can also be useful in
helping to determine the need for low hydrogen processes or preheat where alternatives are
available. A low carbon equivalent indicates a low hardenability material which is less subject to
hydrogen cracking or significant heat affected zone hardening, both of which are factors that should
be considered when determining the preheat need. Additional information on the use of carbon
equivalents in the determination of hardness and for preheat determination may be found in the
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Annex XI45.

7-3
SA-36/SA-36M
Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-36 (Shapes) K02600 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %) (1)


Carbon 0.26 max
Manganese --- (2)
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.05 max
Silicon 0.40 max
Copper 0.20 min (3)
NOTES:
(1) Chemical composition for shapes, refer to specification for composition requirements for plates and bars.
(2) Manganese content of 0.85-1.35% required for Shapes over 426 lb/ft (634 kg/m)
(3) Silicon content of 0.15-0.40% required for Shapes over 426 lb/ft (634 kg/m)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65*


*Based on the maximum Mn and Si content for Shapes over 426 lb/ft (634 kg/m)

Material Properties (1)


Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (3) (Ac1)
58-80 ksi
36 ksi 21(4) Shapes
(400-550 MPa) 1340F (725C)
(250 MPa) 23 (5) Plates
(2)
NOTES:
(1) Longitudinal axis of test specimen shall be parallel to final rolling direction
(2) For wide flange shapes over 426 lb/ft (634 kg/m), the maximum limit on the TS is not applicable
(3) For 2 in. (50 mm) test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)
(4) For wide flange shapes over 426 lb/ft (634 kg/m), the min. elongation for 2 in. (50 mm) specimens is
19%
(5) For plates wider than 24 in. (600 mm), the minimum elongation is 21%.

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be required for seam welded pipe. (See Material Specification).

Common Applications: SA-36 structural shapes have wide usage within nuclear power plants for support
structures. The shapes may be in many different forms such as flanges, channels, angles, tees, and tubes
(structural).

Service: SA-36 shapes are used in support applications where the strength levels are adequate.

7-4
SA-53/SA-53M Type E, Grade A
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-53 Type E, Gr. A K02504 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
Manganese 0.95 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.40 max (1)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (1)
Vanadium 0.08 max (1)
Note (1) The combination of these 5 elements shall not exceed 1.00%

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.56

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
48,000 psi (330 30,000 psi (205
(1) 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
Note: (1) Elongation based on tensile strength and cross section of test specimen (see Material
Specification)

Material Heat Treatment: Not required.

Common Applications: SA-53 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants even though it is
accepted for use in all classes of nuclear construction. Pipe of SA-53 may be used for mechanical or
pressure applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain, sewage, and air
lines.

Service: SA-53 pipe is not normally used in critical applications.

7-5
SA-53/SA-53M Type S, Grade A
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-53 Type S, Gr. A K02504 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
Manganese 0.95 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.40 max (1)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (1)
Vanadium 0.08 max (1)
Note (1) The combination of these 5 elements shall not exceed 1.00%

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.56

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
48,000 psi (330 30,000 psi (205
(1) 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
Note: (1) Elongation based on tensile strength and cross section of test specimen (see Material
Specification)

Material Heat Treatment: Not required.

Common Applications: SA-53 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants even though it is
accepted for use in all classes of nuclear construction. Pipe of SA-53 may be used for mechanical or
pressure applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain, sewage, and air
lines.

Service: SA-53 pipe is not normally used in critical applications.

7-6
SA-53/SA-53M Type E, Grade B
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-53 Type E, Gr. B K03005 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max
Manganese 1.20 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.40 max (1)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (1)
Vanadium 0.08 max (1)
Note (1) The combination of these 5 elements shall not exceed 1.00%

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
60,000 psi (415 35,000 psi (240
Note 1 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on tensile strength and cross section of test specimen (see Material Specification)

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be required for seam welded pipe. (See Material Specification).

Common Applications: SA-53 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants even though it is
accepted for use in all classes of nuclear construction. Pipe of SA-53 may be used for mechanical or
pressure applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain, sewage, and air
lines.

Service: SA-53 pipe is not normally used in critical applications.

7-7
SA-53/SA-53M Type S, Grade B
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-53 Type S, Gr. B K03005 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max
Manganese 1.20 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.40 max (1)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (1)
Vanadium 0.08 max (1)
Note (1) The combination of these 5 elements shall not exceed 1.00%

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
60,000 psi (415 35,000 psi (240
Note 1 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on tensile strength and cross section of test specimen (see Material Specification)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Not required.


Common Applications: SA-53 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants even though it is
accepted for use in all classes of nuclear construction. Pipe of SA-53 may be used for mechanical or
pressure applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain, sewage, and air
lines.

Service: SA-53 pipe is not normally used in critical applications.

7-8
SA-53/SA-53M Type F
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded, and Seamless

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-53 Type F -- 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max
Manganese 1.20 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.40 max (1)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (1)
Vanadium 0.08 max (1)
Note (1) The combination of these 5 elements shall not exceed 1.00%

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
48,000 psi (330 30,000 psi (205
Note 1 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on tensile strength and cross section of test specimen (see Material Specification)

Material Heat Treatment: Not required for furnace welded pipe.

Common Applications: SA-53 Type F pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants as it is not
acceptable for any Section III classes. Pipe of SA-53 Type F may be used for B31.1 mechanical or pressure
applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-53 pipe is not normally used in critical applications.

7-9
SA-105/SA-105M
Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-105 K03504 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max
Manganese 0.60 1.05
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.10 0.35
Copper 0.40 max (1)
Nickel 0.40 max (1)
Chromium 0.30 max (1)(2)
Molybdenum 0.12 max (1)(2)
Vanadium 0.05 max
Columbium 0.02 max
General Note For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum (0.35%), an increase of
0.06% manganese above the specified maximum (1.05%) will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
NOTES:
(1) The sum of copper, nickel, chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 1.00%.
(2) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.70


Note that this material may be ordered with supplementary limitations on the carbon equivalent.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 36,000 psi (250 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (see Material Specification for other test specimen
requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be required for some piping components above Class 300 or of
special design. (See Material Specification).

Common Applications: SA-105 forgings are accepted for all classes of Section III applications. SA-105
forgings may be used for mechanical or pressure applications, and may be acceptable for moderate
temperature steam and water applications.

Service: Normally used for low to moderate temperature service.

7-10
SA-106 Grade A
Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-106, Gr. A K02501 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max (1)
Manganese 0.27 0.93
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 0.10 min
Copper 0.40 max (2)
Nickel 0.40 max (2)
Chromium 0.40 max (2)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (2)
Vanadium 0.08 max (2)
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.57*


* Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation Approx. Lower
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
48,000 psi (330 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) For most test specimens - See Material Specification for specific requirements

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for hot finished pipe. Heat treatment is
required for cold drawn pipe at 1200F (650C) or higher.

Common Applications: SA-106 Grade A pipe has limited usage within nuclear power plants, primarily due
to its relatively low strength. It may be used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed
systems where low service temperatures are not a factor.

Service: Service where carbon steel pipe is acceptable and strength is an insignificant factor.

7-11
SA-106 Grade B
Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-106, Gr. B K03006 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max (1)
Manganese 0.29 - 1.06
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 0.10 min
Copper 0.40 max (2)
Nickel 0.40 max (2)
Chromium 0.40 max (2)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (2)
Vanadium 0.08 max (2)
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.64*


* Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation Approx. Lower
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
60,000 psi (415 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) For most test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for hot finished pipe. Heat treatment is
required for cold drawn pipe at 1200F (650C) or higher.

Common Applications: SA-106 Grade B pipe has high usage within nuclear power plants. It is generally
used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures
are not a factor. It is often used where lower grade pipes (such as SA-53) may be acceptable for reasons
such as reducing pipe inventory.

Service: Wide application for service where carbon steel pipe is acceptable.

7-12
SA-106 Grade C
Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-106, Gr. C K03501 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max (1)
Manganese 0.29 - 1.06
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 0.10 min
Copper 0.40 max (2)
Nickel 0.40 max (2)
Chromium 0.40 max (2)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (2)
Vanadium 0.08 max (2)
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69*


* Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation Approx. Lower
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 40,000 psi (275 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) For most test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for hot finished pipe. Heat treatment is
required for cold drawn pipe at 1200F (650C) or higher.

Common Applications: SA-106 Grade C pipe has high usage within nuclear power plants. It is generally
used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures
are not a factor. It is a higher strength alternative to Grade B pipe.

Service: Not normally used for low temperature service. This material may be specified for its higher
strength properties where SA-106 Grade B may otherwise be used.

7-13
SA-134 (SA283 Gr. C only)
Specification for Pipe, Steel, Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded (Sizes NPS 16 and Over)

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-134 (SA-283 Gr. C) K02401 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.24 max
Manganese 0.90
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
Silicon 0.40 [Note (1)]
Copper 0.20 max
NOTES:
(1) For thickness over 1 in., a silicon range of 0.15 0.40% applies

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.56

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
55-75 ksi (380-515
30 ksi (205 MPa) 25 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Some reduction is allowed for wide (over 24 in.) plates (see Material Specification for specific
requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-134 (SA-283 Grade C) pipe very limited usage within nuclear power plants,
even though it is accepted for use in classes 2 and 3 for nuclear construction. Pipe of SA-134 may be used
for mechanical or pressure applications, and may be acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas, drain,
sewage, and air lines.

Service Precautions: Should not be used in critical applications.

7-14
SA-155 Grade KC55 Class 1 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KC55, Class 1 (A515 Grade 55) (1) K02001 1 1
Note (1): A-155, KC55 was required to be fabricated using A-515 Grade 55 plate.
Class 1 pipe required radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.20 max ( 1 in.)
0.22 max (> 1 in., 2 in.)
Carbon 0.24 max (> 2 in., 4 in.)
0.26 max (> 4 in., 8 in.)
0.28 max (> 8 in.)
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
0.15 0.30 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 0.33% )product analysis)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.58


(Based on Heat Analysis for Si and > 8 in. thickness)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
55.065.0 ksi 30 ksi (207
27 (1) 1340F (725C)
(379-448 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing at 1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F
(593-677C)

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-15
SA-155 Grade KC60 Class 1 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KC60, Class 1 (A515 Grade 60) (1) K02401 1 1
Note (1): A-155, KC60 was required to be fabricated using A-515 Grade 60 plate.
Class 1 pipe required radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.24 max ( 1 in.)
0.27 max (> 1 in., 2 in.)
Carbon
0.29 max (> 2 in., 4 in.)
0.31 max (> 4 in.)
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
0.15 0.30 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 0.33% )product analysis)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.61


(Based on Heat Analysis for Si and > 4 in. thickness)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
60.072.0 ksi 32,000 psi (221
25 (1) 1340F (725C)
(414-496 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing at 1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F
(593-677C)

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-16
SA-155 Grade KC65 Class 1 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KC65, Class 1 (A515 Grade 65) (1) K02800 1 1
Note (1): A-155, KC65 was required to be fabricated using A-515 Grade 65 plate.
Class 1 pipe required radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.28 max ( 1 in.)
Carbon 0.31 max (> 1 in., 2 in.)
0.33 max (> 2 in.)
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
0.15 0.30 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 0.33% )product analysis)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.63


(Based on Heat Analysis for Si and > 2 in. thickness)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
65.077.0 ksi 35,000 psi (241
23 (1) 1340F (725C)
(448-531 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing at 1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F
(593-677C)

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-17
SA-155 Grade KC70 Class 1 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KC70, Class 1 (A515 Grade 70) (1) K03101 1 2
Note (1): A-155, KC70 was required to be fabricated using A-515 Grade 70 plate.
Class 1 pipe required radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.31 max ( 1 in.)
Carbon 0.33 max (> 1 in., 2 in.)
0.35 max (> 2 in.)
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
Silicon 0.15 0.30 (heat analysis)
0.13 0.33% )product analysis)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65


(Based on Heat Analysis for Si and > 2 in. thickness)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
70.085.0 ksi 38,000 psi (262
21 (1) 1340F (725C)
(483-586 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing at 1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F
(593-677C)

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-18
SA-155 Grade KC70 Class 2 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KC70, Class 2 (A515 Grade 70) (1) K03101 1 2
Note (1): A-155, KC70 was required to be fabricated using A-515 Grade 70 plate.
Class 2 pipe did not require radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.31 max ( 1 in.)
Carbon 0.33 max (> 1 in., 2 in.)
0.35 max (> 2 in.)
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
Silicon 0.15 0.30 (heat analysis)
0.13 0.33% )product analysis)

Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65


(Based on Heat Analysis for Si and > 2 in. thickness)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
70.085.0 ksi 38,000 psi (262
21 (1) 1340F (725C)
(483-586 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) Elongation based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Not required for wall thicknesses < in. (19 mm). Normalizing at
1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F (593-677C) for wall thicknesses in. (19 mm).

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-19
SA-155 Grade KCF70 Class 1 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KCF70, Class 1 (A516 Grade 70) (1) K02700 1 2
Note (1): A-155, KCF70 was required to be fabricated using A-516 Grade 70 plate.
Class 1 pipe required radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.27 max ( in. thick)
0.28 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.30 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.31 max (>4 in. thick)
0.85 - 1.20 (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.79 1.30 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.68


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing at 1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F
(593-677C)

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-20
SA-155 Grade KCF70 Class 2 (1972a)
Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-155, KCF70, Class 2 (A516 Grade 70) (1) K02700 1 2
Note (1): A-155, KCF70 was required to be fabricated using A-516 Grade 70 plate.
Class 2 pipe did not require radiography of the seam weld.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.27 max ( in. thick)
0.28 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.30 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.31 max (>4 in. thick)
0.85 - 1.20 (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.79 1.30 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.68


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Not required for wall thicknesses < in. (19 mm). Normalizing at
1750F (955C) max or Stress Relief at 1100-1250F (593-677C) for wall thicknesses in. (19 mm).

Common Applications: SA-155 pipe has relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. Pipe of SA-155
was used for mechanical or pressure applications, and was acceptable for ordinary uses in steam, water, gas,
drain, sewage, and air lines.

Service: SA-155 pipe was not normally used in critical applications.

NOTE: Specification A-155 (SA) was withdrawn in 1978 and replaced with A671, A672, and A691 (SA). The
values shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1972a).

7-21
SA-179/SA-179M
Specification for Seamless Cold-Drawn Low-Carbon Steel Heat-Exchanger and Condenser Tubes

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-179 K01200 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.06 0.18
Manganese 0.27 0.63
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.39

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
47,000 psi (325 MPa) 26,000 psi (180 MPa) 35 1340F (725C)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment is required for after final cold draw at 1200F (650C) or
higher.

Common Applications: SA-179 tube is acceptable only for ASME Section VIII46 heat exchangers within
nuclear power plants.

Service: Low pressure heat exchangers.

7-22
SA-181/SA-181M Class 60
Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-181 Class 60 K03502 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max
Manganese 1.10 max (1)
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.05 max
Silicon 0.10 0.35
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
60,000 psi (415 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 22 1340F (725C)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-181 Class 60 (formerly Grade 1) forgings are used for nonstandard fittings,
valve components, and parts for general service.

Service: May be used in any nuclear class system or for B31.1 applications. Nonstandard fittings may
require qualification.

7-23
SA-181/SA-181M Class 70
Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for General-Purpose Piping

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-181 Class 70 K03502 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max
Manganese 1.10 max (1)
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.05 max
Silicon 0.10 0.35
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 36,000 psi (250 MPa) 18 1340F (725C)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-181 Class 70 forgings are used for nonstandard fittings, valve components, and
parts for general service.

Service: May be used in any nuclear class system or for B31.1 applications. Nonstandard fittings may
require qualification.

7-24
SA-212, Gr. A (1961T)
Tentative Specification for High Tensile Strength Carbon-Silicon Steel Plates for Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-212 Gr. A -- 1 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.28 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.31 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
0.33 max (>2, 8 in. thick)
Manganese 0.90 max (1)
0.04 max (Flange)
Phosphorus
0.035 max (Firebox)
0.05 max (Flange)
Sulfur
0.04 max (Firebox)
0.15 - 0.30 (Ladle analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.33 (Check analysis)
Note (1): The manganese content shall be 0.85 1.20 % if the material is being
supplied to meet the impact requirements of ASTM A-300.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.64


(Based on >2 in. thickness and silicon check analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
65-77 ksi 35 ksi 23 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) Based on Flange material (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in.(50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Some exemptions may be used when hot forming is
done (see Material Specification for specific requirements).

Common Applications: SA-212, Grade A plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication.

NOTE: Specification A-212 (SA) was withdrawn in 1967 and replaced with A515 and A516 (SA). The values
shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1961T).

7-25
SA-212, Gr. B (1961T)
Tentative Specification for High Tensile Strength Carbon-Silicon Steel Plates for Boilers and Other
Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-212 Gr. B -- 1 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.31 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.33 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
0.35 max (>2, 8 in. thick)
Manganese 0.90 max (1)
0.04 max (Flange)
Phosphorus
0.035 max (Firebox)
0.05 max (Flange)
Sulfur
0.04 max (Firebox)
0.15 - 0.30 (Ladle analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.33 (Check analysis)
Note (1): The manganese content shall be 0.85 1.20 % if the material is being
supplied to meet the impact requirements of ASTM A-300.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.66


(Based on >2 in. thickness and silicon check analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-85 ksi 38 ksi 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) Based on Flange material (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Some exemptions may be used when hot forming is
done (see Material Specification for specific requirements).

Common Applications: SA-212, Grade B plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication.

NOTE: Specification A-212 (SA) was withdrawn in 1967 and replaced with A515 and A516 (SA). The values
shown are from the last available edition of the specification (1961T).

7-26
SA-216/SA-216M Grade WCB
Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-216, Gr. WCB J03002 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max (1)
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Copper 0.30 max (2)
Nickel 0.50 max (2)
Chromium 0.50 max (2)
Molybdenum 0.20 max (2)
Vanadium 0.03 max [(2)
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.04% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.28%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1.00% unless the actual (not maximum) carbon
equivalent using the carbon equivalent formula in the specification does not exceed 0.50. The IIW
carbon equivalent formula [CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15] is used for this purpose only.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.73

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
70-95 ksi (485-655
36 ksi (250 MPa) 22 1340F (725C)
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment is required (temperature not specified).

Common Applications: SA-216 Grade WCB fittings have high usage within nuclear power plants. They are
generally used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low service
temperatures are not a factor.

Service: Commonly used for valve bodies.

7-27
SA-216/SA-216M Grade WCC
Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-216, Gr. WCC J02503 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max (1)
Manganese 1.20 max
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Copper 0.30 max (2)
Nickel 0.50 max (2)
Chromium 0.50 max (2)
Molybdenum 0.20 max (2)
Vanadium 0.03 max (2)
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.04% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.40%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1.00% unless the actual (not maximum) carbon
equivalent using the carbon equivalent formula in the specification does not exceed 0.55. The IIW
carbon equivalent formula [CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15] is used for this purpose only.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.71

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
70-95 ksi (485-655
40 ksi (275 MPa) 22 1340F (725C)
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment is required (temperature not specified).

Common Applications: SA-216 Grade WCC fittings are generally used for pressure applications in
secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures are not a factor.

Service: Commonly used for valve bodies.

7-28
SA-234 WPA (1973)
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-234, WPA (1) (2) 1 1
Notes
(1) WPA and WPAW Fittings are not contained in current specifications.
(2) UNS No. is dependent on material of fabrication K02501 for A106 Gr. A pipe, K02200 for A285, Gr. B
plate, K03502 for A181, Gr. 1 forgings.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


A-106, Gr. A Pipe A-285, Gr. B Plate A-181, Gr. 1 Forging (4)
Carbon 0.25 max 0.22 max 0.35 max
0.90 max Heat Analysis
Manganese 0.27 0.93 (1) 0.98 max Product 1.10 max (1)
Analysis
Phosphorus 0.035 max 0.035 max 0.05 max
Sulfur 0.035 max 0.035 max 0.05 max
Silicon 0.10 min -- 0.10 0.35
Copper 0.40 max (2) -- --
Nickel 0.40 max (2) -- --
Chromium 0.40 max (2) -- --
Molybdenum 0.15 max (2) -- --
Vanadium 0.08 max (2) -- --
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese above the
specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
(3) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%
(4) Grade 1 is now Grade 60 in current specifications.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.57* for A-106, Gr. A pipe, 0.47 for A-285, Gr. B plate**, 0.69 for
A-181, Grade 1 forgings.
* Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%
** Based on heat analysis for Manganese

Material Properties
Approx. Lower
Material of Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation
Transformation Temperature
Fabrication (min) (min) (min)
(Ac1)
30 ksi (205
A-106, Gr. A 48 ksi (330 MPa) 25 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
50-70 ksi (345-485 27 ksi (185
A-285, Gr. B 28 (2) 1340F (725C)
MPa) MPa)
30 ksi (205
A-181, Gr. 1 (3) 60 ksi (415 MPa) 22 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Notes
(1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test specimen
requirements)
(2) Based on 2 in (50mm) specimen
(3) Grade 1 is now Class 60 in current specifications

7-29
Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment requirements are based on the material used for
manufacturing and on the forming temperature. For fittings fabricated of A-181 Grade 1 (new Class 60)
forgings, heat treatment is not required. For fittings fabricated of A-106 Grade A or A-285 Grade B, the
following heat treatment requirements apply:

Forming temperature Heat treatment


>1150F (621C), < 1800F (982C) Not required if cooled in still air
<1150F (621C) Stress relief at 1100-1250F (593-677C)
> 1800F (982C) Annealed, normalized, or normalized & tempered

Common Applications: SA-234 WPA fittings have relatively low usage within nuclear power plants. They
are generally used for pressure applications in secondary systems such as steam, water, gas, drain, sewage,
and air lines.

7-30
SA-234/SA-234M WPB/WPBW
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-234, WPB/WPBW (1) K03006 1 1
Note: (1) WPBW fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max (1)
Manganese 0.29 - 1.06
Phosphorus 0.050 max
Sulfur 0.058 max
Silicon 0.10 min
Copper 0.40 max (2)
Nickel 0.40 max (2)
Chromium 0.40 max (2)(3)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (2)(3)
Vanadium 0.08 max
NOTES:
(1) Fittings made from bar or plate may have 0.35 max carbon. Fittings made from forgings may have 0.35
max carbon and 0.35 max silicon with no minimum. For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified
carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese above the specified maximum will be permitted up
to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) These four elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
(3) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.62


(Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%, 0.30% max C)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
60-85 ksi (415-585
35 ksi (240 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment requirements are based on the material used for
manufacturing and on the forming temperature. For fittings fabricated of A-181 Grade 1 (new Class 60)
forgings, heat treatment is not required. For fittings fabricated of A-106 Grade A or A-285 Grade B, the
following heat treatment requirements apply:

Forming temperature Heat treatment


>1150F (621C), < 1800F (982C) Not required if cooled in still air
<1150F (621C) Stress relief at 1100-1250F (593-677C)
> 1800F (982C) Annealed, normalized, or normalized & tempered

Common Applications: SA-234 WPB fittings have high usage within nuclear power plants. They are
generally used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low service
temperatures are not a factor.

7-31
SA-234/SA-234M WPC/WPCW
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-234, WPC/WPCW (1) K03501 1 2
Note: (1) WPCW fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max (1)
Manganese 0.29 - 1.06
Phosphorus 0.050 max
Sulfur 0.058 max
Silicon 0.10 min (2)
Copper 0.40 max (3)
Nickel 0.40 max (3)
Chromium 0.40 max (3)(4)
Molybdenum 0.15 max (3)(4)
Columbium 0.02 max
NOTES:
(1) For each reduction of 0.01% below the specified carbon maximum, an increase of 0.06% manganese
above the specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.
(2) Fittings made from forgings may have 0.35 max silicon with no minimum.
(3) These four elements combined shall not exceed 1%.
(4) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65*


* Based on the minimum Silicon, add (%Si/6) for Si in excess of 0.10%

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
70-95 ksi (485-655
40 ksi (275 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment requirements are based on the material used for
manufacturing and on the forming temperature. For fittings fabricated of A-181 Grade 1 (new Class 60)
forgings, heat treatment is not required. For fittings fabricated of A-106 Grade A or A-285 Grade B, the
following heat treatment requirements apply:

Forming temperature Heat treatment


>1150F (621C), < 1800F (982C) Not required if cooled in still air
<1150F (621C) Stress relief at 1100-1250F (593-677C)
> 1800F (982C) Annealed, normalized, or normalized & tempered

Common Applications: SA-234 WPC fittings are generally used for pressure applications in secondary
systems and classed systems where low service temperatures are not a factor.

7-32
SA-283/SA-283M Gr. C
Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-283 Gr. C K02401 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.24 max
Manganese 0.90
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
Silicon 0.40 (1)
Copper 0.20 max
NOTE: (1) For thickness over 1 in., a silicon range of 0.15 0.40% applies

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.56

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
55-75 ksi (380-515
30 ksi (205 MPa) 25 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Some reduction is allowed for wide (over 24 in.) plates (see Material Specification for specific
requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-283 Grade C plate may be used for structural applications

7-33
SA-285/SA-285M Gr. A
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-285 Gr. A K01700 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.17 max
0.90 max (Heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (Product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.42


(Based on Heat Analysis for Mn)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
45-65 ksi (310-450
24 ksi (165 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-285 Grade A plate may be used for fusion welded pressure vessel applications.

7-34
SA-285/SA-285M Gr. B
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-285 Gr. B K02200 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.22 max
0.90 max (Heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (Product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.47


(Based on Heat Analysis for Mn)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
50-70 ksi (345-385
27 ksi (185 MPa) 28 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-285 Grade B plate may be used for fusion welded pressure vessel applications

7-35
SA-285/SA-285M Gr. C
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-285 Gr. C K02801 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.28 max
0.90 max (Heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (Product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.53


(Based on Heat Analysis for Mn)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
55-75 ksi (380-515
30 ksi (205 MPa) 27 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required.

Common Applications: SA-285 Grade C plate may be used for fusion welded pressure vessel applications.

7-36
SA-333/SA-333M Grade 6
Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-333, Gr. 6 K03006 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max (1)
Manganese 0.29 - 1.06
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.10 min
NOTE: (1) For each reduction of 0.01% below 0.30%, an increase of 0.05% manganese above the
specified maximum will be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.49


(Based on the minimum Silicon, add %Si/6 for Si in excess of 0.10%)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
60,000 psi (415 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
Note (1) For most test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the microstructure.

Common Applications: SA-333 Grade 6 pipe has high usage within nuclear power plants. It is generally
used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures
may be a factor.

7-37
SA-350/SA-350M LF1
Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for
Piping Components

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-350, LF1 K03009 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max
Manganese 0.60 1.35
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.15 0.30 (1)
Copper 0.40 max (2)
Nickel 0.40 max (2)
Chromium 0.30 max (2)(3)
Molybdenum 0.12 max (2)(3)
Columbium 0.02 max
Vanadium 0.05 max (2)
NOTES:
(1) A further limitation on the Si content may be the result of Supplemental requirements (See material
specification)
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1.00%.
(3) These two elements combined shall not exceed 0.32% based on heat analysis.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69

Material Properties
Charpy
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength V-Notch (2)
(min) (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(Ave.)
13 ft-lb
60-85 ksi (415- 30 ksi (205 at -20F
28 (1) 1340F (725C)
585 MPa) MPa) 18 J
at -28.9C
NOTES:
(1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (see Material Specification for other test specimen
requirements)
(2) For Standard Size (10mm x 10mm) Specimens

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the microstructure.

Common Applications: SA-350, Gr. LF1 forgings are commonly used for pressure applications in
secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures may be a factor.

7-38
SA-350/SA-350M LF2
Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness Testing for
Piping Components

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-350, LF2, Classes 1 and 2 K03011 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max
Manganese 0.60 - 1.35
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.15-0.30 [Note (1)]
Copper 0.40 max [Note (2)]
Nickel 0.40 max [Note (2)]
Chromium 0.30 max [Notes (2)(3)]
Molybdenum 0.12 max [Notes (2)(3)]
Columbium 0.02 max
Vanadium 0.05 max [Note (2)]
NOTES:
General: Materials manufactured before 4/1996 may have different chemical composition requirements
(1) A further limitation on the Si content may be the result of Supplemental requirements (See material
specification)
(2) These five elements combined shall not exceed 1.00%.
(3) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69

Material Properties
Class 1 Class 2
Yield
Tensile % Elongation Charpy Charpy Approx. Lower
Strength
Strength (min) V-Notch V-Notch TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min)
(2) (Ave.) (2) (Ave.)
15 ft-lb 20 ft-lb
70-95 ksi
36 ksi (250 at -50F at 0F
(485-655 30 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
MPa) 20 J at - 27 J at -
45.6C 18C
NOTES:
(1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (see Material Specification for other test specimen
requirements)
(2) For Standard Size (10mm x 10mm) Specimens

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the microstructure.

Common Applications: SA-350, Gr. LF2 forgings are commonly used for pressure applications in
secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures may be a factor.

7-39
SA-420/SA-420M WPL6
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Low-Temperature
Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-420, WPL6 K03006 (1) 1 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.30 max (1)
Manganese 0.60 - 1.35
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.15-0.30
Copper 0.40 max
Nickel 0.40 max
Chromium 0.30 max
Molybdenum 0.12 max
Columbium 0.02 max
Vanadium 0.05 max
NOTE: (1) For each reduction of 0.01% below 0.30%, an increase of 0.05% manganese above 1.06% will
be permitted up to a maximum of 1.35%.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.72

Material Properties
Charpy
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength V-Notch (2)
(min) (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(Ave.)
13 ft-lb at -
60-85 ksi (415- 35,000 psi 50F
30 (1) 1340F (725C)
585 MPa) (240 MPa) 17 J at
-45C
NOTES:
(1) For most test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)
(2) For Standard Size (10mm x 10mm) Specimens

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the microstructure.

Common Applications: SA-420, WPL6 fittings are commonly used for pressure applications in secondary
systems and classed systems where low service temperatures may be a factor.

7-40
SA-508/SA-508M Grade 1
Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings for
Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-508, Grade 1 K13502 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.35 max
Manganese 0.40 - 1.05
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.15-0.40 (1)
Nickel 0.40 max
Chromium 0.25 max
Molybdenum 0.10 max
Vanadium 0.05 max
NOTE: (1) A further limitation on the Si content may be the result of Supplemental requirements (See
material specification)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.70

Material Properties
Charpy
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength V-Notch
(min) (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(Ave.)
15 ft-lb at
70-95 ksi (485- 36 ksi (250 +40F
20 1340F (725C)
655 MPa) MPa) 20J at
+ 4.4C

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the microstructure.

Common Applications: SA-508, Gr. 1 forgings are commonly used for pressure vessel applications in
secondary systems and classed systems where moderately low service temperatures may be a factor.

7-41
SA-515/SA-515M Gr. 55 (1982 (R87))
Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-515 Gr. 55 (1) K02001 1 1
Note: (1) Grade has been discontinued in specification, information from A515 -82 (R87).

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.20 max ( 1 in. thick)
0.22 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
Carbon 0.24 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.26 max (>4, 8 in. thick)
0.28 max (> 8 in. thick)
0.90 max (Heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (Product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.60


(Based on >8 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
55-75 ksi (380-515
30 ksi (205 MPa) 27 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness.

Common Applications: SA-515, Grade 55 plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication,
although its use would be very limited in Class 1 systems.

7-42
SA-515/SA-515M Gr. 60
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-515 Gr. 60 K02401 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.24 max ( 1 in. thick)
0.27 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.29 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.31 max (>4 in. thick)
0.90 max (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.63


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
60-80 ksi (415-550
32 ksi (220 MPa) 25 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness.

Common Applications: SA-515, Grade 60 plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication,
although its use would be very limited in Class 1 systems.

7-43
SA-515/SA-515M Gr. 65
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-515 Gr. 65 K02800 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.28 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.31 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
0.33 max (>2 in. thick)
0.90 max (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.98 max (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.65


(Based on >2 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
65-85 ksi (450-585
35 ksi (240 MPa) 23 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness.

Common Applications: SA-515, Grade 65 plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication.

7-44
SA-515/SA-515M Gr. 70
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature
Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-515 Gr. 70 K03101 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.31 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.033 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
0.35 max (>2 in. thick)
1.20 max (heat analysis)
Manganese
1.30 max (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.72


(Based on >2 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 2 in. (50mm) thickness. Normalizing
heat treatment required for > 2 in. (50mm) thickness.

Common Applications: SA-515, Grade 70 plates are primarily used for pressure vessels fabrication.

7-45
SA-516/SA-516M Gr. 55
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-516 Gr. 55 K01800 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.18 max ( in. thick)
0.20 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon 0.22 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.24 max (>4, 8 in. thick)
0.26 max (>8 in. thick)
0.60 0.90 (heat analysis) ( in. (12.5 mm) thick)
0.55 0.98 (product analysis) ( in. (12.5 mm) thick)
Manganese
0.60 - 1.20 (heat analysis) (> in. (12.5 mm) thick)
0.55 1.30 (product analysis) (> in. (12.5 mm) thick)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.63


(Based on >8 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
55-75 ksi (380-515
30 ksi (205 MPa) 27 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 1 in. (38mm) thickness (exception
may apply when toughness tests are required). Normalizing heat treatment required for > 1 in. (38mm)
thickness.

Common Applications: SA-516, Grade 55 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-46
SA-516/SA-516M Gr. 60
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-516 Gr. 60 K02100 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.21 max ( in. thick)
0.23 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.25 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.27 max (>4 in. thick)
0.60 - 0.90 (heat analysis) ( in (12.5 mm))
0.55 0.98 (product analysis) ( in (12.5 mm))
Manganese
0.60 - 1.20 (heat analysis) (> in (12.5 mm))
0.55 1.30 (product analysis) (> in (12.5 mm))
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.64


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
60-80 ksi (415-550
32 ksi (220 MPa) 25 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 1 in. (38mm) thickness (exception
may apply when toughness tests are required). Normalizing heat treatment required for > 1 in. (38mm)
thickness.

Common Applications: SA-516, Grade 60 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-47
SA-516/SA-516M Gr. 65
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-516 Gr. 65 K02403 1 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.24 max ( in. thick)
0.26 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.28 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.29 max (>4 in. thick)
0.85 1.20 (heat analysis
Manganese
0.79 1.30 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.66


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
65-85 ksi (450-585
35 ksi (240 MPa) 23 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 1 in. (38mm) thickness (exception
may apply when toughness tests are required). Normalizing heat treatment required for > 1 in. (38mm)
thickness.

Common Applications: SA-516, Grade 65 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-48
SA-516/SA-516M Gr. 70
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and Lower-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-516 Gr. 70 K02700 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.27 max ( in. thick)
0.28 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.30 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.31 max (>4 in. thick)
0.85 - 1.20 (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.79 1.30 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.68


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment not required for 1 in. (38mm) thickness (exception
may apply when toughness tests are required). Normalizing heat treatment required for > 1 in. (38mm)
thickness.

Common Applications: SA-516, Grade 70 plates are primarily used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-49
SA-537/SA-537M Class 1
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon Steel

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-537 Class 1 K12437 1 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.24 max
0.70 - 1.35 (heat analysis) ( 1 in. thickness)
0.64 1.46 (product analysis) ( 1 in. thickness)
Manganese (1)
1.00 - 1.60 (heat analysis) (> 1 in. thickness)
0.92 1.72 (product analysis) (> 1 in. thickness)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.50 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.55 (product analysis)
0.35 max (heat analysis)
Copper
0.38 max (product analysis)
0.25 max (heat analysis)
Nickel [Note (1)]
0.28 max (product analysis)
0.25 max (heat analysis)
Chromium
0.29 max (product analysis)
0.08 max (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.09 max (product analysis)
NOTE: (1) Manganese and Nickel contents may be increased slightly provided actual calculated CE does
not exceed 0.57%. The IIW carbon equivalent formula [CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15] is
used for this purpose only.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.70


(Based on >1 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
Approx. Lower
% Elongation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min) Transformation
(min)
Temperature (Ac1)
50 ksi (345 MPa)
70-90 ksi (485-620 MPa)
( 2 in. ( 65 mm)
( 2 in. ( 65 mm) thickness)
thickness)
45 ksi (310 MPa) 22 (1) 1340F (725C)
65-85 ksi (450-585 MPa)
(> 2 in., 4 in. (> 65
(> 2 in., 4 in. (> 65 mm,
mm, 100 mm)
100 mm) thickness)
thickness)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-537, Class 1 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-50
SA-671 CC70 Class 32 (SA-516, Gr. 70)
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for Atmospheric and Lower Temperatures

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-671 CC70 Class 32 (SA-516 Gr. 70) K02700 (1) 1 2
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.27 max ( in. thick)
0.28 max (> , 2 in. thick)
Carbon
0.30 max (>2, 4 in. thick)
0.31 max (>4 in. thick)
0.85 - 1.20 (heat analysis)
Manganese
0.79 1.30 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.68


(Based on >4 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing heat treatment at 1700F (925C) required.

Required examinations and tests: Radiography and Pressure Tests required. See Material Specification.

Common Applications: SA-671, CC70 Class 32 pipes are used for high-pressure service where impact
toughness may be required.

7-51
SA-672 B70 Classes 20 & 22 (SA-515, Gr. 70)
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel Pipe for High-Pressure Service at Moderate
Temperatures

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-672 B70 Classes 20 & 22 (SA-515, Gr. 70) K03101 (1) 1 2
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.31 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.033 max (>1, 2 in. thick)
0.35 max (>2 in. thick)
1.20 max (heat analysis)
Manganese
1.30 max (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.72


(Based on >2 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min)
(min) Temperature (Ac1)
70-90 ksi (485-620
38 ksi (260 MPa) 21 (1) 1340F (725C)
MPa)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Postweld heat treatment after welding required in range 1100-1250F
(590-680C).

Required examinations and tests: Radiography and Pressure Tests required for Class 22. See Material
Specification.

Common Applications: SA-672, B70 pipes are used for high-pressure service at moderate temperatures.

7-52
SA-691 CMSH-70 (SA-537, Cl. 1)
Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded for High-Pressure Service at
High Temperatures

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS P/S Group
Number No. No.
SA-691 CMSH-70 (SA-537, Cl. 1) K12437 (1) 1 2
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.24 max
0.70 - 1.35 (heat analysis) ( 1 in. thickness)
0.64 1.46 (product analysis) ( 1 in. thickness)
Manganese [Note (1)]
1.00 - 1.60 (heat analysis) (> 1 in. thickness)
0.92 1.72 (product analysis) (> 1 in. thickness)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.50 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.55 (product analysis)
0.35 max (heat analysis)
Copper
0.38 max (product analysis)
0.25 max (heat analysis)
Nickel [Note (1)]
0.28 max (product analysis)
0.25 max (heat analysis)
Chromium
0.29 max (product analysis)
0.08 max (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.09 max (product analysis)
NOTES:
(1) Manganese and Nickel contents may be increased slightly provided actual calculated CE does not exceed 0.57%
The IIW carbon equivalent formula [CE = C + Mn/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15] is used for this purpose only.

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.70


(Based on >1 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
Approx. Lower
% Elongation
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min) Transformation
(min)
Temperature (Ac1)
50 ksi (345 MPa)
70-90 ksi (485-620 MPa)
( 2 in. ( 65 mm)
( 2 in. ( 65 mm) thickness)
thickness)
45 ksi (310 MPa) 22 (1) 1340F (725C)
65-85 ksi (450-585 MPa)
(> 2 in., 4 in. (> 65
(> 2 in., 4 in. (> 65 mm,
mm, 100 mm)
100 mm) thickness)
thickness)
Note (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-537, Class 1 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

7-53
8
CARBON MOLYBDENUM STEELS (P NO. 3)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that apply to
specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of the material
specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific requirements that apply
to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of the scope of this
information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding procedures, the heat
treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied. While generally
categorized as carbon molybdenum steels, this group also includes carbon manganese steels.

Cutting Methods:
Carbon molybdenum steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Fuel gas torch
Plasma torch
Water jet

When carbon molybdenum steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, a light grinding may
be required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. Preheat
should be considered when thermal cutting is used on carbon molybdenum steels. If the
thermally shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized surface
layer should be totally removed and some sub-surface material may also require removal.

Welding:
Carbon molybdenum steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding
processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional
processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high
volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of the process is based
on a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility

8-1
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and chemical
composition. Carbon molybdenum steels in the P No. 3 category have a wide range of
strengths and also with some additions of manganese and/or chromium so the filler metal
selection may also cover a wide range. The welding procedure specification (WPS) being
used should in general provide direction on the filler metal to be used but caution is advised
since the filler metal used for the WPS qualification may be a significantly lower strength
than needed for the materials being welded.

The requirements for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) vary widely within the
different codes. These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of
the procedure includes preheat and PWHT variables. Carbon molybdenum steels should not
be welded when cold so a minimum preheat of 50F (10C) is often required. Elevated
preheats of 175F (80C) may be required for thicker or higher strength materials. PWHT is
a much more complicated issue as a result of widely varying code requirements. If the
material being welded is less than 5/8 in. (16 mm) at the weld, PWHT will not be required by
the codes. Above that thickness, the exemption of PWHT may be allowed based on the rules
that apply within the specific code being followed. The thickness that applies may be the
weld thickness (defined in the specific code) or the material thickness (either the thinner or
the thicker of the materials being welded, depending on the specific code). Other factors
such as joint type and preheat (may be a different temperature than the preheat requirement)
also may affect the need to perform PWHT. However, the requirements of the WPS must
also be followed which may result in the need to do preheat and/or PWHT even if the code of
record does not require it.

Service Precautions:
Carbon molybdenum steels are susceptible to boric acid corrosion and must be protected
from exposure to borated water solutions. Carbon molybdenum steels are also susceptible to
rusting (oxidation) when directly exposed to moist environments. Protective coatings or
other protective measures may be required to avoid these corrosion problems. Carbon
molybdenum steels also do not generally perform well in environments determined to be
susceptible to flow assisted corrosion or to cavitation. However, some P No. 3 materials
have a small addition of chromium which will significantly improve its resistance to flow
assisted corrosion.

Carbon Equivalent:
The generally accepted carbon equivalent (CE) equation by the ASME Codes is:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15

8-2
However, if the analysis of all of the elements is not available, the CE may be determined by
using 0.1 for the last two terms of the equation, resulting in the CE equation:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + 0.1

These equations were used when calculating the CE for the materials contained in Section II.
The CE calculated when the specification did not contain limits on Cr, Mo, V, Ni, or Cu
therefore used the 0.1 adder. These CE were also calculated using the maximum limit of the
elements listed. Therefore the CE values listed for the materials in Section II are extremely
conservative compared with a CE calculated using actual values. If a mill test report or a
chemical analysis of the actual material is available, the calculated CE would likely be much
lower. A suggested reference for the comparison between the calculated maximum CE and
the CE calculated using actual values is EPRI Report 1006799, Realistic Carbon Equivalent
for Underwater Welding47 .

Outside of special applications such as underwater welding, the use of carbon equivalents in
the ASME Codes is generally limited but may be very useful in determining the appropriate
preheats when the preheat temperature is not mandated by the applicable Code. It can also
be useful in helping to determine the need for low hydrogen processes or preheat where
alternatives are available. A low carbon equivalent indicates a low hardenability material
which is less subject to hydrogen cracking or significant heat affected zone hardening, both
of which are factors that should be considered when determining the preheat need.
Additional information on the use of carbon equivalents in the determination of hardness and
for preheat determination may be found in the AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Annex
XI48.

8-3
SA-234/SA-234M WP1
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-234 WP1 K12821 3 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.28 max
Manganese 0.30 0.90
Phosphorus 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.10 - 0.50
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.64

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
55-80 ksi
(380-550 30 ksi (205 MPa) 30 (1) 1350F (730C)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing, a normalize and temper, or a tempering heat
treatment at 1200 F is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP1 products are used for piping applications where moderately
high temperatures are anticipated.

8-4
SA-302/SA-302M Grade B
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-Molybdenum and
Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-302 Grade B K12022 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


0.20 max ( 1 in. thick)
Carbon 0.23 max (> 1, 2 in. thick)
0.25 max (>2 in. thick)
1.15 - 1.50 (heat analysis)
Manganese
1.07 1.62 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15 - 0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13 - 0.45 (product analysis)
0.45 - 0.60 (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.41 - 0.64 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69


(Based on >2 in. thickness and heat analysis)

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
80-100 ksi
50 ksi (345
(550-690 18 (1) 1350F (730C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note: (1) Based on 2 in. specimen (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Normalizing heat treatment is required for material in excess of
2 in. (50mm)

Common Applications: SA-302, Gr. B plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-5
SA-508/SA-508M Grade 2, Class 1
Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings
for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-508 Grade 2, Class 1 K12766 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.27 max
Manganese 0.50 - 1.00
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.15 - 0.40
Nickel 0.50 1.00
Chromium 0.25 0.45
Molybdenum 0.55 - 0.70
Vanadium 0.05 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.81

Material Properties
Yield Charpy
Tensile % Elongation Approx. Lower
Strength V-Notch
Strength (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min) (Ave)
30 ft-lb
80-105 ksi 50 ksi (345 at +40F
18 1350F (730C)
(550-725 MPa) MPa) 41J at
4.4C

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a level required to achieve an austenitic structure and quenching,
a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1200F (650C) is held for a minimum of hour per inch of
section thickness.

Common Applications: SA-508, Gr. 2, Cl. 1 forgings are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-6
SA-508/SA-508M Grade 2, Class 2
Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings
for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-508 Grade 2, Class 2 K12766 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.27 max
Manganese 0.50 - 1.00
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.15 - 0.40
Nickel 0.50 1.00
Chromium 0.25 0.45
Molybdenum 0.55 - 0.70
Vanadium 0.05 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.81

Material Properties
Yield Charpy
Tensile % Elongation Approx. Lower
Strength V-Notch
Strength (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min) (Ave)
35 ft-lb
90-115 ksi 65 ksi (450 at +70F
16 1350F (730C)
(620-795 MPa) MPa) 48 J at
21C

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a level required to achieve an austenitic structure and quenching,
a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1150F (620C) is held for a minimum of hour per inch of
section thickness.

Common Applications: SA-508, Gr. 2, Cl. 2 forgings are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-7
SA-508/SAQ-508M Grade 3, Class 1
Specification for Quenched and Tempered Vacuum-Treated Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings
for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-508 Grade 3, Class 1 K12042 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
Manganese 1.20 - 1.50
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.15 - 0.40
Nickel 0.40 1.00
Chromium 0.25 max
Molybdenum 0.45 - 0.60
Vanadium 0.05 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.81

Material Properties
Yield Charpy
Tensile % Elongation Approx. Lower
Strength V-Notch
Strength (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min) (Ave)
30 ft-lb
80-105 ksi 50 ksi (345 at +40F
18 1350F (730C)
(550-725 MPa) MPa) 41 J at
4.4C

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a level required to achieve an austenitic structure and quenching,
a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1200F (650C) is held for a minimum of hour per inch of
section thickness.

Common Applications: SA-508, Gr. 3, Cl. 1 forgings are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-8
SA-533/SA-533M Type A, Class 1
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-
Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-533 Type A, Class 1 K12521 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
1.15 -1.50 (heat analysis)
Manganese
1.07 -1.62 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15-0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13-0.45 (product analysis)
0.45-0.60 (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.41-0.64 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69


(Based on heat analysis)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
80-100 ksi (550- 50 ksi (345
18 1350F (730C)
690 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a temperature between 1550F to 1800F (845 to 980C) and
quenching in water, a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1100F (595C) is held for a minimum
of hour per inch of section thickness (1/2 hour min.).

Common Applications: SA-533, Type A, Cl. 1 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-9
SA-533/SA-533M Type A, Class 2
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-
Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-533 Type A, Class 2 K12521 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
1.15 -1.50 (heat analysis)
Manganese (1)
1.07-1.62 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15-0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13-0.45 (product analysis)
0.45-0.60 (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.41-0.64 (product analysis)
NOTES:
(1) Manganese content may be increased slightly under certain restrictions (See material specification).

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.69


(Based on heat analysis)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
90-115 ksi (620- 70 ksi (485
16 1350F (730C)
795 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a temperature between 1550F to 1800F (845 to 980C) and
quenching in water, a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1100F (595C) is held for a minimum
of hour per inch of section thickness (1/2 hour min.).

Common Applications: SA-533, Type A, Cl. 2 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-10
SA-533/SA-533M Type B, Class 1
Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Quenched and Tempered, Manganese-
Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum-Nickel

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-533 Type B, Class 1 K12539 3 3

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.25 max
1.15 -1.50 (heat analysis)
Manganese
1.07 -1.62 (product analysis)
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
0.15-0.40 (heat analysis)
Silicon
0.13-0.45 (product analysis)
0.45-0.60 (heat analysis)
Molybdenum
0.41-0.64 (product analysis)
0.40-0.70 (heat analysis)
Nickel
0.37-0.73 (product analysis)

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.73


(Based on heat analysis)

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) (Ac1)
80-100 ksi (550- 50 ksi (345
18 1350F (730C)
690 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A quench and tempering heat treatment is required. After
raising the material temperature to a temperature between 1550F to 1800F (845 to 980C) and
quenching in water, a tempering temperature of a minimum of 1100F (595C) is held for a minimum
of hour per inch of section thickness (1/2 hour min.).

Common Applications: SA-533, Type B, Cl. 1 plates are used for pressure vessel fabrication.

8-11
9
LOW CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS
(P NO. 4)
The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.
This group of materials are generally categorized as low chromium-molybdenum steels
with a chromium content of 0.5% to 1.25%. (The 0.5% Cr materials also contain a high
Mn content.)

Cutting Methods:
Low chromium-molybdenum steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Fuel gas torch
Plasma torch
Water jet

Thermal cutting using the fuel gas methods may not results in smooth cuts. When low
chromium-molybdenum steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, grinding may be
required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. Preheat
should be considered when thermal cutting is used on low chromium-molybdenum steels.
If the thermally shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized
surface layer should be totally removed and some sub-surface material may also require
removal.

Welding:
Low chromium-molybdenum steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical
welding processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the
additional processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for
fabrication or high volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of
the process is based on a large number of factors, which include:
Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding

9-1
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and chemical
composition. Low chromium-molybdenum steels in the P No. 4 category have a limited
range of strengths (60-85 KSI) so the filler metal selection is more limited, with the
criteria for matching composition being more significant. The welding procedure
specification (WPS) being used should in general provide direction on the filler metal to
be used but caution is advised since the filler metal used for the WPS qualification may
be a lower strength than needed for the materials being welded.

The requirements for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) vary widely within
the different codes. These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the
qualification of the procedure includes preheat and PWHT variables. The code
requirements for preheat range from a recommended 250-300F (120-150C) based on
thickness and strength to a mandatory 250F (120C) for all P No. 4 materials. PWHT is
a much more complicated issue as a result of widely varying code requirements. The
exemption of PWHT may be allowed based on the rules that apply within the specific
code being followed. The thickness that applies may be the weld thickness (defined in
the specific code) or the material thickness (either the thinner or the thicker of the
materials being welded, depending on the specific code). Other factors such as joint type
and preheat (may be a different temperature than the preheat requirement) also may affect
the need to perform PWHT. For P No. 4 materials, the temperature required for the
PWHT may be significantly different in the different codes. The requirements of the
WPS must also be followed and at times may result in the need to do preheat and/or
PWHT even if the code of record does not require it.

In order to reduce the possibility of hydrogen cracking (also called cold cracking, delayed
cracking, and underbead cracking), several precautions are advised. If flux-bearing
welding processes are used, the flux should be protected from adsorbing moisture by
maintaining at an elevated temperature. Low hydrogen fluxes and electrodes are also
advisable. In addition, preheat is used to prevent hydrogen cracking and to allow the
hydrogen to escape from the solid solution material before cracking can occur.

Service Precautions:
Low chromium-molybdenum steels are susceptible to boric acid corrosion (albeit less
susceptible than carbon steel alloys that do not contain chromium) and must be protected
from exposure to borated water solutions. This group of materials is also somewhat
susceptible to cavitation. Protective coatings or other protective measures may be
required to avoid corrosion problems. Low chromium-molybdenum steels perform well
in environments determined to be susceptible to flow assisted corrosion.

9-2
Carbon Equivalent:
The generally accepted carbon equivalent (CE) equation by the ASME Codes is:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15

However, if the analysis of all of the elements is not available, the CE may be determined
by using 0.1 for the last two terms of the equation, resulting in the CE equation:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + 0.1

These equations were used when calculating the CE for the materials contained in
Section II. The CE calculated when the specification did not contain limits on Cr, Mo, V,
Ni, or Cu therefore used the 0.1 adder. These CEs were also calculated using the
maximum limit of the elements listed. Therefore the CE values listed for the materials in
Section II are extremely conservative compared with a CE calculated using actual values.
If a mill test report or a chemical analysis of the actual material is available, the
calculated CE would likely be much lower. A suggested reference for the comparison
between the calculated maximum CE and the CE calculated using actual values is EPRI
Report 1006799, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding49 .

Outside of special applications such as underwater welding, the use of carbon equivalents
in the ASME Codes is generally limited but may be very useful in determining the
appropriate preheats when the preheat temperature is not mandated by the applicable
Code. It can also be useful in helping to determine the need for low hydrogen processes
or preheat where alternatives are available. A low carbon equivalent indicates a low
hardenability material which is less subject to hydrogen cracking or significant heat
affected zone hardening, both of which are factors that should be considered when
determining the preheat need. Additional information on the use of carbon equivalents in
the determination of hardness and for preheat determination may be found in the AWS
D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Annex XI50.

9-3
SA-182/SA-182M Grade F11, Class 1
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-182 Grade F11, Class 1 K11597 4 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.50 1.00
Chromium 1.00 1.50
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.85

Material Properties
Tensile Yield % Brinell
Approx. Lower
Strength Strength Elongation Hardness
TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min) (min) (min) No.
60 ksi 30 ksi (205
20 121-174 1430F (775C)
(415 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper at 1150F (620C)
heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-182, Grade F11, Cl. 1 products are used for piping applications
where high temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

9-4
SA-217/SA-217M WC5
Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-217 WC5 J22000 4 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.20
Manganese 0.40 0.70
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Nickel 0.60 1.00
Chromium 0.50 0.90
Molybdenum 0.90 1.20
Copper 0.50 max
Tungsten 0.10 max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.94

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
70-95 ksi
40 ksi (275
(485-655 20 1375F (745C)
MPa)
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize and temper (1100 F min) heat treatment is
required.

Common Applications: SA-217, WC5 castings are used for flanges, valves, fittings, and other
pressure containing parts where high temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is
anticipated.

9-5
SA-234/SA-234M WP11, Class 1
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-234 WP11, Class 1 -- 4 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.50 1.00
Chromium 1.00 1.50
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.85

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
60-85 ksi
30 ksi (205
(415-585 30 (1) 1430F (775C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and tempering (at 1150F
(620C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP11, Cl. 1 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

9-6
SA-234/SA-234M WP11, Class 2
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-234 WP11, Class 2 -- 4 (1) --
Note (1): P No. assigned for B31.1 applications only

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.20
Manganese 0.30 0.80
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.50 1.00
Chromium 1.00 1.50
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.93

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
70-95 ksi
40 ksi (275
(485-655 30 (1) 1430F (775C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and tempering (at 1150F
(620C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP11, Cl. 2 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated. The Class 2 material is
not listed in ASME Sections III or IX.

9-7
SA-234/SA-234M WP12, Class 1
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S
Material Specification(s) Group No.
Number No.
SA-234 WP12, Class 1 K12062 4 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.20
Manganese 0.30 0.80
Phosphorus 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Chromium 0.80 1.25
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.81

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
60-85 ksi
32 ksi (220
(415-585 30 (1) 1375F (745C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing, a normalize and tempering (at 1150F
(620C) minimum) or a tempering (at 1200F (650C)) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP12, Cl. 1 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

9-8
SA-234/SA-234M WP12, Class 2
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-234 WP12, Class 2 K12062 4(1) 1(1)
P No., Group No. not specifically listed in ASME Section IX, QW/QB-422 but may be assigned P No.,
Group No. based on QW-420.1 rules.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.20
Manganese 0.30 0.80
Phosphorus 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Chromium 0.80 1.25
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.81

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
70-95 ksi
40 ksi (275
(485-655 30 (1) 1375F (745C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing, a normalize and temper (at 1150F (620C)
minimum), or a tempering (at 1200F (650C)) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP12, Cl. 2 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

9-9
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P11
Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-335 Grade P11 K11597 4 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.50 1.00
Chromium 1.00 1.50
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.85

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
60 ksi 30 ksi (205
30 (1) 1430F (775C)
(415 MPa) MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and tempering (at 1200F
(650C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-335, Grade P11 pipe is used for piping applications where there is
susceptibility to flow-assisted corrosion.

9-10
10
HIGH CHROMIUM-MOLYBDENUM STEELS
(P NOS. 5A AND 5B)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.
These groups of materials are generally categorized as high chromium-molybdenum
steels with a chromium content of 2.25-3% for P No. 5A materials and 5-9% for P No.
5B materials. Prior to the 1991 Addenda to ASME Section IX, P Nos. 5A and 5B were
both contained by P No. 5 (P No. 5 also contained P No. 5C materials at that time).

Cutting Methods:
High chromium-molybdenum steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

Thermal cutting using the fuel gas methods are not generally used on materials which
have more than 2% Cr. When high chromium-molybdenum steels are cut or shaped by
thermal methods, grinding may be required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer
prior to other operations. Preheat should be considered (and may be required by some
codes) when thermal cutting is used on high chromium-molybdenum steels. Thermally
shaped or cut surface should not be left without further welding or heat treatment
operations.

10-1
Welding:
High chromium-molybdenum steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical
welding processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the
additional processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for
fabrication or high volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of
the process is based on a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and chemical
composition. High chromium-molybdenum steels in the P No. 5A category have a
limited range of strengths (60-75 KSI) and composition (2.25-3% Cr) so the filler metal
selection is limited. However, the materials in the P No. 5B category has a fairly large
range of strengths (60-90 KSI) and a significant range of chemical compositions (5-9%
Cr with additional variations of Mo and V. The welding procedure specification (WPS)
being used should in general provide direction on the filler metal to be used but caution is
advised since the filler metal used for the WPS qualification may different in terms of
strength or composition than the materials being welded.

The requirements for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) vary widely within
the different codes. These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the
qualification of the procedure includes preheat and PWHT variables. For P Nos. 5A and
5B materials, the code requirements for preheat range from 300F (150C) to 400F
(200C) based on thickness, strength, and Cr content. While some codes only
recommend preheat, welding these materials without preheat is not advisable. PWHT is
a much more complicated issue as a result of widely varying code requirements. The
exemption of PWHT may be allowed based on the rules that apply within the specific
code being followed. The thickness that applies may be the weld thickness (defined in
the specific code) or the material thickness (either the thinner or the thicker of the
materials being welded, depending on the specific code). Other factors such as joint type
and preheat also may affect the need to perform PWHT. The requirements of the WPS
must also be followed and at times may result in the need to do preheat and/or PWHT
even if the code of record does not require it.

In order to reduce the possibility of hydrogen cracking (also called cold cracking, delayed
cracking, and underbead cracking), several precautions are advised. If flux-bearing
welding processes are used, the flux should be protected from adsorbing moisture by
maintaining at an elevated temperature. Low hydrogen fluxes and electrodes are also

10-2
advisable. In addition, preheat is used to prevent hydrogen cracking and to allow the
hydrogen to escape from the solid solution material before cracking can occur.

Grade 91 materials (P No. 5B, Group 2) are creep strength enhanced materials intended
for high temperature use. The use of these materials in conventional nuclear plants is
discouraged since significant controls are required for fabricating these materials.

Service Precautions:
High chromium-molybdenum steels are susceptible to boric acid corrosion (albeit less
susceptible than carbon steel alloys that do not contain chromium) and must be protected
from exposure to borated water solutions. This group of materials is also somewhat
susceptible to cavitation. Protective coatings or other protective measures may be
required to avoid corrosion problems. High chromium-molybdenum steels perform well
in environments determined to be susceptible to flow assisted corrosion.

Carbon Equivalent:
The generally accepted carbon equivalent (CE) equation by the ASME Codes is:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + (Cr + Mo + V)/5 + (Ni + Cu)/15

However, if the analysis of all of the elements is not available, the CE may be determined
by using 0.1 for the last two terms of the equation, resulting in the CE equation:

CE = C + (Mn + Si)/6 + 0.1

These equations were used when calculating the CE for the materials contained in
Section II. The CE calculated when the specification did not contain limits on Cr, Mo, V,
Ni, or Cu therefore used the 0.1 adder. These CE were also calculated using the
maximum limit of the elements listed. Therefore the CE values listed for the materials in
Section II are extremely conservative compared with a CE calculated using actual values.
If a mill test report or a chemical analysis of the actual material is available, the
calculated CE would likely be much lower. A suggested reference for the comparison
between the calculated maximum CE and the CE calculated using actual values is EPRI
Report 1006799, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding51 .

Outside of special applications such as underwater welding, the use of carbon equivalents
in the ASME Codes is generally limited but may be very useful in determining the
appropriate preheats when the preheat temperature is not mandated by the applicable
Code. It can also be useful in helping to determine the need for low hydrogen processes
or preheat where alternatives are available. A low carbon equivalent indicates a low
hardenability material which is less subject to hydrogen cracking or significant heat
affected zone hardening, both of which are factors that should be considered when

10-3
determining the preheat need. Additional information on the use of carbon equivalents in
the determination of hardness and for preheat determination may be found in the AWS
D1.1 Structural Welding Code, Annex XI52.

10-4
SA-182/SA-182M Grade F5
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-182 Grade F5 K41545 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Nickel 0.50 max
Chromium 4.0 6.0
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.70

Material Properties
Tensile Yield % Brinnell
Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength Strength Elongation Hardness
Temperature (Ac1)
(min) (min) (min) No.
70 ksi 40 ksi (275
20.0 143 - 217 1505F (820C)
(485 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing (at 1750F/955C minimum) or a normalize


and temper (at 1750F/955C minimum followed by a tempering at 1250F/675C) heat treatment
is required.

Common Applications: SA-182, Grade F5 products are used for piping applications where high
temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion (FAC) is anticipated. Except in
exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-5
SA-182/SA-182M Grade F9
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-182 Grade F9 K90941 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.50 1.00
Chromium 8.0 10.0
Molybdenum 0.90 1.10

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.64

Material Properties
Tensile Yield % Brinnell
Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength Strength Elongation Hardness
Temperature (Ac1)
(min) (min) (min) No.
85 ksi 55 ksi (380
20.0 179 - 217 1475F (800C)
(585 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing (at 1750F/955C minimum) or a normalize


and temper (at 1750F/955C minimum followed by a tempering at 1250F/675C) heat treatment
is required.

Common Applications: SA-182, Grade F9 products are used for piping applications where high
temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion (FAC) is anticipated. Except in
exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-6
SA-182/SA-182M Grade F22, Class 1
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-182 Grade F22, Class 1 K21590 5A 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 2.00 2.50
Molybdenum 0.87 1.13

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.06

Material Properties
Tensile Yield % Brinell
Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength Strength Elongation Hardness
Temperature (Ac1)
(min) (min) (min) No.
60 ksi 30 ksi (205
20 170 max 1480F (805C)
(415 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing (at 1650F/900C minimum) or a normalize


and temper (at 1650F/90C minimum followed by a tempering at 1250F/675C) heat treatment
is required.

Common Applications: SA-182, Grade F22, Cl. 1 products are used for piping applications
where high temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

10-7
SA-182/SA-182M Grade F91
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves
and Parts for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-182 Grade F91 K91560 5B 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 -0.12
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.020 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 0.20 0.50
Nickel 0.40 max
Chromium 8.0 9.5
Molybdenum 0.85 1.05
Columbium (Niobium) 0.06 0.10
Nitrogen 0.03 0.07
Aluminum 0.04 max
Vanadium 0.18 0.25

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.49

Material Properties
Tensile Yield % Brinnell
Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength Strength Elongation Hardness
Temperature (Ac1)
(min) (min) (min) No.
85 ksi 60 ksi (415
20.0 248 max 1475F (800C)
(585 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize and temper (at 1900-2000F/1040-1095C


followed by a tempering at 1350F/730C) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-182, Grade F91 products are used for piping applications where
high temperature strength is required. Except in exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to
use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur. However, it is not generally recommended
due to the fabrication sensitivity of the material.

10-8
SA-217/SA-217M C5
Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-217 C5 J42045 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.20 max
Manganese 0.40 0.70
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 4.00 6.50
Molybdenum 0.45 0.65
Copper 0.50 max (1)
Nickel 0.50 max (1)
Tungsten 0.10 max (1)
Note (1): Total of these three elements = 1.00% max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.94

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
90-115 ksi
60 ksi (415
(620-795 18 1505F (820C)
MPa)
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize and temper (at 1250F (675C) minimum) heat
treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-217, C5 castings are used for piping applications where high
temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion (FAC) is anticipated. Except in
exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-9
SA-217/SA-217M C12
Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SA-217 C12 J82090 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.20 max
Manganese 0.35 0.65
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 8.00 10.00
Molybdenum 0.90 1.20
Copper 0.50 max (1)
Nickel 0.50 max (1)
Tungsten 0.10 max (1)
Note (1): Total of these three elements = 1.00% max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.78

Material Properties
Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Tensile Strength
(min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
90-115 ksi
60 ksi (415 MPa) 18 1475F (800C)
(620-795 MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize and temper (at 1250F (675C) minimum) heat
treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-217, C12 castings are used for piping applications where high
temperature or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion (FAC) is anticipated. Except in
exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.
.

10-10
SA-217 /SA-217M WC9
Specification for Steel Castings, Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for Pressure-Containing
Parts, Suitable for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-217 WC9 J21890 5A 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 - 0.18
Manganese 0.40 0.70
Phosphorus 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.045 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Chromium 2.00 2.75
Molybdenum 0.90 1.20
Copper 0.50 max (1)
Nickel 0.50 max (1)
Tungsten 0.10 max (1)
Note (1): Total of these three elements = 1.00% max

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.25

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
70-95 ksi
40 ksi (275
(485-655 20 1480F (805C)
MPa)
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize and temper (at 1250F (675C) minimum) heat
treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-217, WC9 castings are used for flanges, valves, fittings, and other
pressure containing parts where high temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is
anticipated.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-11
SA-234/SA-234M WP5
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-234 WP5 K41545 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 4.0 6.0
Molybdenum 0.44 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.66

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
60-85 ksi
30 ksi (205 MPa) 30 (1) 1505F (820C)
(415-585 MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F
(675C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP5 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated. Except in exceptional
circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-12
SA-234/SA-234M WP9
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-234 WP9 S50400 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.25 1.00
Chromium 8.0 10.0
Molybdenum 0.90 1.10

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.64

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
60-85 ksi
30 ksi (205 MPa) 30 (1) 1475F (800C)
(415-585 MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F
(675C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP5 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated. Except in exceptional
circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-13
SA-234/SA-234M WP22, Class 1
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-234 WP22, Class 1 K21590 5A 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 1.90 2.60
Molybdenum 0.87 1.13

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.08

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
Strength (min) (min) (Ac1)
60-85 ksi
30 ksi (205
(415-585 30 (1) 1480F (805C)
MPa)
MPa)
Note (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F
(675C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP22, Cl. 1 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-14
SA-234/SA-234M WP22, Class 3
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
Group
Material Specification(s) UNS Number P/S No.
No.
SA-234 WP22, Class 3 K21590 5A (1) 1
Note: (1) P No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 1.90 2.60
Molybdenum 0.87 1.13

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.08

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
75-100 ksi
45 ksi (310 MPa) 30 (1) 1480F (805C)
(520-690 MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F
(675C) minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP22, Cl. 3 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-15
SA-234/SA-234M WP91
Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-234 WP91 K90901 (1) 5B 2
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 -0.12
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.020 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 0.20 0.50
Nickel 0.40 max
Chromium 8.0 9.5
Molybdenum 0.85 1.05
Columbium (Niobium) 0.06 0.10
Nitrogen 0.03 0.07
Aluminum 0.04 max
Vanadium 0.18 0.25

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.49

Material Properties
Tensile Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
Strength (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
85-110 ksi
60 ksi (415 MPa) 20 (1) 1475F (800C)
(585-760 MPa)

NOTE: (1) For round specimens, minimum % in 4D.

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize (at 1900-2000F/1040-1095C) and temper (at
1350F/730C minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-234, WP5 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperature strength is required. Except in exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use
this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur. However, it is not generally recommended
due to the fabrication sensitivity of the material.

10-16
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P5
Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-335 Grade P5 K41545 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 4.00 6.00
Molybdenum 0.45 0.65

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.66

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
(min) (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
60 ksi
30 ksi (205 MPa) 30 (1) 1505F (820C)
(415 MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F/675C
minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-335, Grade P5 pipe is used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated. Except in exceptional
circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-17
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P9
Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-335 Grade P9 S50400 5B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.25 1.00
Chromium 8.00 10.00
Molybdenum 0.90 1.10

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.64

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation
(min) (min) (min) Temperature (Ac1)
60 ksi
30 ksi (205 MPa) 30 (1) 1475F (800C)
(415 MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F/675C
minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-335, Grade P9 pipe is used for piping applications where high
temperatures or susceptibility to flow assisted corrosion is anticipated. Except in exceptional
circumstances, it is not necessary to use this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-18
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P22
Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-335 Grade P22 K21590 5A 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.05 0.15
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Chromium 1.90 2.60
Molybdenum 0.87 1.13

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 1.08

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower TransformationTemperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
60 ksi 30 ksi (205
30 (1) 1480F (805C)
(415 MPa) MPa)
Note: (1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (8mm) (see Material Specification for other test
specimen requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: An annealing or a normalize and temper (at 1250F/675C
minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-335, Grade P22 pipe is used for piping applications where there is
susceptibility to flow-assisted corrosion.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur.

10-19
SA-335/SA-335M Grade P91
Standard Specification for Seamless Ferritic Alloy-Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SA-335 Grade P91 K91590 5B 2

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 0.12
Manganese 0.30 0.60
Phosphorus 0.020 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 0.20 0.50
Chromium 8.00 9.50
Molybdenum 0.85 1.05
Vanadium 0.18 0.25
Nitrogen 0.030 0.070
Nickel 0.40 max
Aluminum 0.04 max
Columbium (Niobium) 0.06 0.10

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 2.49

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Approx. Lower Transformation Temperature
(min) (min) (min) (Ac1)
85 ksi 60 ksi (415
20 1475F (800C)
(585 MPa) MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: A normalize (at 1900F/1040C minimum) and temper (at
1350F/730C minimum) heat treatment is required.

Common Applications: SA-335, Grade P91 fittings are used for piping applications where high
temperature strength is required. Except in exceptional circumstances, it is not necessary to use
this material in nuclear applications.

Service: This material may be used in high temperature water systems or feedwater systems
where potentially high local flow velocities may occur. However, it is not generally recommended
due to the fabrication sensitivity of the material.

10-20
11
MARTENSITIC STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 6)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Martensitic stainless steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

When martensitic stainless steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, grinding may be
required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. If the
thermally shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized
surface layer should be totally removed. The material under the thermally cut surface
and the oxidized surface will also likely be affected by the heat involved.

Caution is required to avoid depositing ferritic carbon or low alloy steel particles on the
surface of the martensitic stainless steel. Such particles may result in surface rusting or
local pitting.

11-1
Welding:
Martensitic stainless steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding
processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional
processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used to address specific
welding issues. The selection of the process is based on a large number of factors which
include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Availability of filler metal product forms
Welding procedure availability

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on strength,
weldability, and chemical composition. Martensitic stainless steels in the P No. 6
category has a fairly narrow range of compositions. The filler metals selected may have a
similar composition but an austenitic stainless or nickel alloy filler metal may be used to
increase weldability. However there may be an increase in susceptibility to stress
corrosion cracking when austenitic filler metals are used. The welding procedure
specification (WPS) being used should in general provide direction on the filler metal to
be used. The selection of filler metals for joints between different grades of martensitic
stainless steels can be a match of either grade or may be some intermediate composition.

Preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) is usually required in the codes. The
preheat is needed more for the prevention of hydrogen cracking than to reduce the
hardening effects of cooling during welding. PWHT will help to increase toughness but
in some cases, an annealing heat treatment is used.

These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables.

Service Precautions:
Martensitic stainless steels have limited application as a pressure containing component.
However, in applications where high strength, abrasion resistance, low ductility, and
corrosion resistance are needed, matensitic stainless steels may be used. Applications
may include pump and valve components.

11-2
SA-479/SA-479M Type 410
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure
Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-479, Type 410 S41000 6 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.15 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 11.5 13.5

Material Properties
Tensile Strength % Elongation
Condition (1) Yield Strength (min) Brinnell Hardness
(min) (min)
Annealed 70 ksi (485 MPa) 40 ksi (275 MPa) 20 223
1 70 ksi (485 MPa) 40 ksi (275 MPa) 20 223
Note (1): Heat treatment condition, see Required material heat treatment.

Required Material Heat Treatment: SA-479, Type 410 stainless steel shall be provided in the
annealed condition unless specified to be in other conditions. Condition 1 requires the material to
be normalized or quenched from 1700F (925C) followed by tempering for at least 1 hour at
1250F (675C) to 1400F (760C).

Common Applications: SA-479, Type 410 materials are typically used as pump or valve parts
where high strength, hardness, and corrosion resistance are required.

11-3
12
AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 8)
The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that apply to
specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of the material
specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific requirements that apply to
these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of the scope of this information,
such as the requirements of the design, the welding procedures, the heat treatment, or other
special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Austenitic stainless steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

When austenitic stainless steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, a light grinding may be
required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. If the thermally
shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized surface layer should
be totally removed.
Caution is required to avoid depositing ferritic carbon or low alloy steel particles on the surface
of the austenitic stainless steel. Such particles may result in surface rusting or local pitting.

Welding:
Austenitic stainless steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding
processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional
processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high
volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of the process is based on
a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

12-1
The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and
chemical composition. Austenitic stainless steels in the P No. 8 category have many
compositions which should usually be matched by the filler metal. The filler metals selected
should also have a small percentage of retained delta ferrite (>5 FN) in order to avoid micro-
cracking which is a concern with purely austenitic materials. The selection of the filler metal
to meet this need may be based on guidance provided in accordance with NB/C/D/F-243353.
The welding procedure specification (WPS) being used should in general provide direction on
the filler metal to be used but caution is advised since there is such a large number of filler
metal types which would be qualified for the WPS. The selection of filler metals for joints
between different grades of austenitic stainless steels can be a match of either grade or may be
some intermediate composition. The selection of filler metals for joints between austenitic
stainless steels and ferritic steels would typically be an austenitic material with a higher Cr and
Ni content, such as a Type 309 grade. In some cases, the filler metal selected may be chosen to
provide a transition between the austenitic metal and the ferritic metal based on thermal
expansion characteristics. In these cases, the filler metal chosen would likely be a nickel based
metal. Ferritic filler metals should not be selected when welding austenitic stainless steels.

In those cases where austenitic stainless steels are being welded to ferritic steels and the ferritic
steels require PWHT, some additional techniques may be required. The PWHT for the ferritic
steels may cause unacceptable sensitization in the austenitic stainless steels. One technique is
to add a short piece of austenitic stainless steel piping to the end of a ferritic steel nozzle
(called a safe end) prior to a furnace PWHT of the vessel. This effectively eliminates the
requirement to PWHT the weld to the austenitic stainless steel piping in the field. This
technique has the problem that the safe end material may be sensitized during the furnace
PWHT if not adequately controlled by material selection.

A second technique for welding ferritic steels to austenitic steels is to butter the ferritic
member prior to PWHT. Buttering is a technique where a build up of the end of the ferritic
member with austenitic filler metal is done. This build up is normally at least 3/16 in. thick,
after the weld preparation is completed for the weld to the austenitic member. After PWHT of
the buttered end, the weld may be made to the austenitic member without the need for PWHT.
Since weld metal is typically less susceptible than base material to sensitization, this technique
is an effective way to make an austenitic to ferritic joint.

There is no requirement for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) in the codes other
than a minimum 50F (10C). However there are often limits placed on the temperature of the
material during the welding, called the interpass temperature. The interpass temperature is
typically limited to 350F (175C) to limit degradation due to carbide precipitation (called
sensitization). Heat treating below 700F (370C) for dimensional stability is acceptable.
Local heat treatment above 700F (370C) is not done but components that can be entirely heat
treated may be quench annealed (solution heat treated) in order to reduce or eliminate
sensitization.

12-2
Sensitization results in the depletion of the chromium in localized areas adjacent to chromium
carbides. This depleted area may be lacking in the chromium content needed to resist
corrosion.

Additional techniques to limit sensitization include using low heat input (25kJ/in or less)
process variables. A difficulty may occur in achieving proper penetration with low heat input
welds when welding without the addition of filler metal if the sulfur content is below 0.005%.
When welding without filler metal, the chemical analysis of the product must be such that a
minimum of 5 FN is achieved.

The use of materials, including welding filler materials, with low carbon content also is an
effective way of reducing sensitization. This is particularly used in applications where the
operating temperatures are not high (which is typically true in pressurized water nuclear plants)
since low carbon content will reduce the strength at high temperatures. Low carbon and very
low carbon materials are available as L grades and LN grades. While these low carbon
grades will have lower strength levels, particularly at higher temperatures, the advantage to
reduce sensitization may outweigh the disadvantage of slightly lower strength at the
temperatures occurring in nuclear plants.

Another way of reducing the occurrence of sensitization is by adding small amounts of


elements that form thermally-stable carbides, preventing the formation of chromium carbides.
The elements which are used are columbium (niobium) and titanium. A common material that
has columbium additions for this purpose is Type 347 stainless steel.

The addition of molybdenum (such as in Type 316 or Grade CF8M materials) does not
specifically reduce sensitization. However this alloy addition does improve resistance to
chloride-induced pitting attack.

Although not normally performed during repair applications in the field, austenitic stainless
steels are generally solution annealed to meet the material specification requirements. This
solution anneal is performed by the material or component manufacturer. It is generally done
by heating to 1900-1950F (1025-1065C) followed by rapid cooling (quenching). This is done
to avoid sensitization. However, cast materials are typically solution heat treated for an hour or
two per inch of thickness (at the same temperature) but are not rapid cooled following the heat
cycle. This allows the nonuniform distribution of chemical elements in the microstructure
resulting from casting to become more uniform through diffusion. Some casting alloys may be
somewhat subject to sensitization due to high carbon contents. Due to the presence of ferrite in
cast alloys, the material may be slightly magnetic.

These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables.

12-3
Service Precautions:
Austenitic stainless steels perform poorly in an environment where water-soluble chloride salts
and other halogen compounds can be concentrated. Halogens include fluorine, chlorine,
bromine, iodine, and astatine. Sources of these compounds are insulation, markers, paints, oils,
adhesives, adhesive tape, or gaskets. Another source of halogens may be water that is used for
cleaning or hydrostatic testing. The effect of halogens may be magnified in the presence of
high oxygen contents. Concentrating mechanisms such as crevices and dead legs should be
avoided where possible. Water that is left stagnant inside a pipe or vessel may grow bacteria
colonies and cause microbiologically induced corrosion (MIC) which is characterized by the
presence of hard tubercles on the pipe surface and pitting beneath the tubercles.

12-4
SA-182/SA-182M F304
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.0 - 11.0
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
liquid quench).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-5
SA-182/SA-182M F304L
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F304L S30403 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.0 - 13.0
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
liquid quench).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-6
SA-182/SA-182M F316
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 10.0 - 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
liquid quench).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-7
SA-182/SA-182M F316L
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F316L S31603 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 10.0 - 15.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
liquid quench).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-8
SA-182/SA-182M F347
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F347 S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 17.0 - 20.0
Nickel 9.0 - 13.0
Columbium (10 X C) min, 1.10% max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
liquid quench).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-9
SA-213/SA-213M TP304
Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-
Exchanger Tubes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-213, TP304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.00 11.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-10
SA-213/SA-213M TP304L
Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-
Exchanger Tubes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-213, TP304L S30403 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.00 13.0
Note: (1): May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-11
SA-213/SA-213M TP316
Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-
Exchanger Tubes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-213, TP316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 11.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-12
SA-213/SA-213M TP316L
Specification for Seamless Ferritic and Austenitic Alloy-Steel Boiler, Superheater, and Heat-
Exchanger Tubes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-213, TP316L S31603 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max (2)
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 15.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00
Notes:
(1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification
(2) Si max for seamless tubes may be 1.00%

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-13
SA-240, Type 304
Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-240, Type 304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.00 - 20.00
Nickel 8.00 - 10.50
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 201 92

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-14
SA-240, Type 304L
Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-240, Type 304L S30403 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.00 - 20.00
Nickel 8.00 12.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 201 92

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-15
SA-240, Type 316
Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-240, Type 316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00
Nickel 10.00 - 14.00
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 217 95

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-16
SA-240, Type 316L
Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-240, Type 316L S31603 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00
Nickel 10.00 - 14.00
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 217 95

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important. Low carbon grades are often used in nuclear applications
where high temperature performance is not required.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-17
SA-240, Type 347
Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet
and Strip for Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-240, Type 347 S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 17.00 - 19.00
Nickel 9.00 - 13.00
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (10 X C) min, 1.00% max.

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 201 92

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1950F/1065C maximum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-18
A-269-00, TP304
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-269, TP304 (1) S30400 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.0 11.0

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
(1) (1) (1) 192 90
Note: (1) Not specified in A-269

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-19
A-269-00, TP316
Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-269, TP316 (1) S31600 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
(1) (1) (1) 192 90
Note: (1) Not specified in A-269

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-20
A-276-00a, Type 304
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-276, 304 S30400 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.0 11.0

Material Properties (1)


Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
Hot finished 75,000 psi (515 MPa)
30,000 psi (205 MPa) (2) 40 (3)
(2)
Cold finished in
90,000 psi (620 MPa) 45,000 psi (310 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Cold finished > in. 75,000 psi (515 MPa)
30,000 psi (205 MPa) (2) 30
(12.70 mm) (2)
Notes:
(1) Properties given for annealed condition, material may be supplied in other strain hardened conditions.
Repairs on other conditions may cause significant strength reductions. (See specification.)
(2) For extruded shapes, TS may be 70 ksi (485 MPa) and YS may be 25 ksi (170 MPa).
(3) For shapes of section thickness in. (12.5 mm), 30% min elongation is acceptable.

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be furnished in various conditions see specification.

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-21
A-276-00a, Type 304L
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-276, 304L S30403 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.0 12.0

Material Properties (1)


Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
Hot finished 70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 (2)
Cold finished in
90,000 psi (620 MPa) 45,000 psi (310 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Cold finished > in.
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Notes:
(1) Properties given for annealed condition, material may be supplied in other strain hardened conditions.
Repairs on other conditions may cause significant strength reductions. (See specification.)
(2) For shapes of section thickness in. (12.5 mm), 30% min elongation is acceptable.

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be furnished in various conditions see specification.

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-22
A-276-00a, Type 316
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-276, 316 S31600 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00

Material Properties (1)


Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
Hot finished 75,000 psi (515 MPa)
30,000 psi (205 MPa) (2) 40 (3)
(2)
Cold finished in
90,000 psi (620 MPa) 45,000 psi (310 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Cold finished > in. 75,000 psi (515 MPa)
30,000 psi (205 MPa) (2) 30
(12.70 mm) (2)
Notes:
(1) Properties given for annealed condition, material may be supplied in other strain hardened conditions.
Repairs on other conditions may cause significant strength reductions. (See specification.)
(2) For extruded shapes, TS may be 70 ksi (485 MPa) and YS may be 25 ksi (170 MPa).
(3) For shapes of section thickness in. (12.5 mm), 30% min elongation is acceptable.

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be furnished in various conditions see specification.

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-23
A-276-00a, Type 316L
Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
A-276, 316L S31603 S8 1
Note: (1) For B31.1 applications only.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00

Material Properties (1)


Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
Hot finished 70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 (2)
Cold finished in
90,000 psi (620 MPa) 45,000 psi (310 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Cold finished > in.
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30
(12.70 mm)
Notes:
(1) Properties given for annealed condition, material may be supplied in other strain hardened conditions.
Repairs on other conditions may cause significant strength reductions. (See specification.)
(2) For shapes of section thickness in. (12.5 mm), 30% min elongation is acceptable.

Required Material Heat Treatment: May be furnished in various conditions see specification.

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-24
SA-312/SA-312M TP304
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.0 11.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-25
SA-312/SA-312M TP304L
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 304L S30403 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.0 - 11.0
Note: (1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1950F/1065C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-26
SA-312/SA-312M TP316
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 11.0 - 14.0 (1)
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Note: (1) Nickel content range is 10.0-14.0 % for welded products.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-27
SA-312/SA-312M TP316L
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 316L S31603 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 10.0 - 15.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Note: (1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-28
SA-312/SA-312M TP317L
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 317L S31703 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 11.0 - 15.0
Molybdenum 3.00 - 4.00
Note: (1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-29
SA-312/SA-312M TP347
Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-312, TP 347 S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 17.0 - 20.0
Nickel 9.0 - 13.0
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (10 X C) min, 1.00 max.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-30
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF3
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF3 J92500 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 12.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 0.50 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-31
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF3A
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF3A J92500 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 12.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 0.50 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
77,000 psi (530 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-32
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF3MA
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF3MA J92800 8 (1) 1
Note: (1) P No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.50 max
Nickel 9.0 - 13.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 2.0 - 3.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80,000 psi (550 MPa) 37,000 psi (255 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-33
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF3M
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF3M J92800 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.50 max
Nickel 9.0 - 13.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 2.0 - 3.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-34
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF8
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF8 J92600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 11.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 0.50 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-35
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF8A
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF8A J92600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 11.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 0.50 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
77,000 psi (530 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-36
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CF8M
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-Containing Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CF8M J92900 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.50 max
Nickel 9.0 - 12.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 2.0 3.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Temperature not specified but typically
1900F/1040C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-37
SA-358/SA-358M Type 304
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-358, Type 304 (Made from SA-240 Type 304 plate) S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.00 - 20.00
Nickel 8.00 - 10.50
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 201 92

This material must be purchased from a supplier that has an appropriate Code Symbol Stamp (e.g.
NPT, N, etc.) and a partial data report must be provided. See the notes at the beginning of SA-358 for
additional details. This note does not apply to pipe furnished under ASTM A-358 for B31.1 applications.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-38
SA-358/SA-358M Type 304L
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-358, Type 304L (Made from SA-240 Type 304L plate) S30403 (1) 8 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.00 - 20.00
Nickel 8.00 12.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 201 92

This material must be purchased from a supplier that has an appropriate Code Symbol Stamp (e.g.
NPT, N, etc.) and a partial data report must be provided. See the notes at the beginning of SA-358 for
additional details. This note does not apply to pipe furnished under ASTM A-358 for B31.1 applications.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-39
SA-358/SA-358M Type 316
Specification for Electric-Fusion-Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-358, Type 316 (Made from SA-240 Type 316 plate) S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00
Nickel 10.00 - 14.00
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 217 95

This material must be purchased from a supplier that has an appropriate Code Symbol Stamp (e.g.
NPT, N, etc.) and a partial data report must be provided. See the notes at the beginning of SA-358 for
additional details. This note does not apply to pipe furnished under ASTM A-358 for B31.1 applications.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-40
SA-358/SA-358M Type 316L
Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-358, Type 316L (Made from SA-240 Type 316L plate) S31603 (1) 8 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.00 - 18.00
Nickel 10.00 - 14.00
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 40 217 95

This material must be purchased from a supplier that has an appropriate Code Symbol Stamp (e.g.
NPT, N, etc.) and a partial data report must be provided. See the notes at the beginning of SA-358 for
additional details. This note does not apply to pipe furnished under ASTM A-358 for B31.1 applications.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-41
SA-358/SA-358M Type 347
Specification for Electric Fusion Welded Austenitic Chromium-Nickel Alloy Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-358, Type 347 (Made from SA-240 Type 347 plate) S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 17.00 - 19.00
Nickel 9.00 - 13.00
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (10 X C) min, 1.00% max.

Material Properties
% Elongation Brinnell
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) Rockwell B Hardness
(min) Hardness
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 40 201 92

This material must be purchased from a supplier that has an appropriate Code Symbol Stamp (e.g.
NPT, N, etc.) and a partial data report must be provided. See the notes at the beginning of SA-358 for
additional details. This note does not apply to pipe furnished under ASTM A-358 for B31.1 applications.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Approximately 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-42
SA-376/SA-376M TP304
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.00 - 11.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-43
SA-376/SA-376M TP304LN
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 304LN S30453 (1) 8 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.00 - 11.0
Nitrogen 0.10 0.16

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-44
SA-376/SA-376M TP316
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 11.0 - 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-45
SA-376/SA-376M TP316LN
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 316LN S31653 (1) 8 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 11.0 - 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 - 0.16

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-46
SA-376/SA-376M TP321
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 321 S32100 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 17.0 20.0
Nickel 9.00 13.0
Titanium (5 X C) min, 0.60 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (480 MPa) (1) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) (2) 35 (3)
Notes:
(1) 75 ksi (515 MPa) for thicknesses 1/8 in.
(2) 30 ksi (205 MPa) for thicknesses 1/8 in.
(3) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-47
SA-376/SA-376M TP347
Specification for Seamless Austenitic Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Central Station Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-376, TP 347 S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Chromium 17.0 - 20.0
Nickel 9.00 - 13.0
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (10 X C) min, 1.00 max.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-48
SA-403/SA-403M WP304/WP304W
Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-403, WP304 & WP304W (1) S30400 8 1
Note: (1) WPW Fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.00 - 11.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 28 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Fittings identified as WP-S are seamless, WP-W are welded and radiographed if welded using filler
metal, WP-WX are welded and all welds have been radiographed, WP-WU and all welds have been
ultrasonically examined.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-49
SA-403/SA-403M WP304L/WP304LW
Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-403, WP304L & WP304LW (1) S30403 8 1
Note: (1) WPW Fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 - 20.0
Nickel 8.00 - 13.0
Note: (1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 28 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Fittings identified as WP-S are seamless, WP-W are welded and radiographed if welded using filler
metal, WP-WX are welded and all welds have been radiographed, WP-WU and all welds have been
ultrasonically examined.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-50
SA-403/SA-403M WP316/WP316W
Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-403, WP316 & WP316W (1) S31600 8 1
Note: (1) WPW Fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 10.0 - 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 28 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Fittings identified as WP-S are seamless, WP-W are welded and radiographed if welded using filler
metal, WP-WX are welded and all welds have been radiographed, WP-WU and all welds have been
ultrasonically examined.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-51
SA-403/SA-403M WP316L/WP316LW
Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-403, WP316L & WP316LW S31603 8 1
Note: (1) WPW Fittings are of welded construction.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.035 max (1)
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 - 18.0
Nickel 10.0 - 16.0 (2)
Molybdenum 2.00 - 3.00
NoteS:
(1) May contain 0.040% max C content for small diameter or thin wall tubes see Specification.
(2) Nickel limited to 11.0 16.00% for pierced tubing.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 28 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Fittings identified as WP-S are seamless, WP-W are welded and radiographed if welded using filler
metal, WP-WX are welded and all welds have been radiographed, WP-WU and all welds have been
ultrasonically examined.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1065C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-52
SA-403/SA-403M WP347
Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-403, WP 347 S34700 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 17.0 - 20.0
Nickel 9.00 - 13.0
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (10 X C) min, 1.10 max.

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 28 (1)
Note: (1) Longitudinal elongation

Fittings identified as WP-S are seamless, WP-W are welded and radiographed if welded using filler
metal, WP-WX are welded and all welds have been radiographed, WP-WU and all welds have been
ultrasonically examined.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900-2100F/1040-1150C minimum


followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-53
SA-451, Grade CPF3
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF3 J92500 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 12.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-54
SA-451, Grade CPF3A
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF3A J92500 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 12.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
77,000 psi (535 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-55
SA-451, Grade CPF3M
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF3M J92800 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.50 max
Nickel 9.0 - 13.0
Chromium 17.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 2.0 - 3.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-56
SA-451, Grade CPF8
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF8 J92600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 - 11.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Typically 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-57
SA-451, Grade CPF8A
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF8A J92600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 2.00 max
Nickel 8.0 11.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
77,000 psi (535 MPa) 35,000 psi (240 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (Typically 1900F/1040C minimum
followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-58
SA-451, Grade CPF8M
Specification for Centrifugally Cast Austenitic Pipe for High Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-451, Grade CPF8M J92900 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.50 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.50 max
Nickel 9.0 - 12.0
Chromium 18.0 - 21.0
Molybdenum 2.0 3.0

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-59
SA-479/SA-479M Type 304
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-479, Type 304 S30400 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.0 10.5
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) (1) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30
Note: (1) Tensile strength of 70 ksi (485 MPa) permitted for extruded shapes.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling). (Subsequent light cold drawing or straightening permitted.)

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-60
SA-479/SA-479M Type 304L
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-479, Type 304L S30403 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 18.0 20.0
Nickel 8.0 12.0
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling). (Subsequent light cold drawing or straightening permitted.)

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-61
SA-479/SA-479M Type 316
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-479, Type 316 S31600 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (515 MPa) (1) 30,000 psi (205 MPa) 30
Note: (1) Tensile strength of 70 ksi (485 MPa) permitted for extruded shapes.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling). (Subsequent light cold drawing or straightening permitted.)

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear systems.

12-62
SA-479 /SA-479M Type 316L
Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-479, Type 316L S31603 8 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Chromium 16.0 18.0
Nickel 10.0 14.0
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00
Nitrogen 0.10 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (485 MPa) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (1900F/1040C minimum followed by
rapid cooling). (Subsequent light cold drawing or straightening permitted.)

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and piping
where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is important,
such as in primary nuclear system

12-63
13
NICKEL ALLOYS (P NOS. 42, 43, & 45)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Nickel alloys may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

When nickel alloys are cut or shaped by thermal methods, grinding may be required to
remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. If the thermally
shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized surface layer
should be totally removed.

Caution is required to avoid depositing ferritic carbon or low alloy steel particles on the
surface of the nickel alloys. Such particles may result in surface rusting or local pitting.

Welding:
Nickel alloys may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding processes
used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional processes of
GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high volume
repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of the process is based on a
large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

13-1
Availability of welding materials

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and
chemical composition. Nickel alloys in the P Nos. 41-46 categories have many
compositions which should usually be matched by the filler metal. In some cases the
filler metal overmatches the alloys in the base metals since some of the elements do not
transfer across the arc very well. The intent is that the weld metal achieves a composition
similar to the base material. The welding procedure specification (WPS) being used
should in general provide direction on the filler metal to be used. The selection of filler
metals for joints between different grades of nickel alloys can be a match of either grade
or may be some intermediate composition. The selection of filler metals for joints
between nickel alloys and ferritic or austenitic steels would typically be a nickel alloy
material. Nickal alloy filler metals are often used for such dissimilar joints due both to
the metallurgical characteristics of the resulting welds and to the thermal expansion
coefficient of the nickel alloys (which result in a transitional thermal expansion between
the materials).

There is no requirement for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) in the codes
other than a minimum 50F (10C). However there are often limits placed on the heat
input during welding or on the temperature of the material during the welding, called the
interpass temperature. These limitations are needed to avoid excessive annealing of the
heat affected zone and to avoid heavy local oxidation. Sensitization can also be a factor,
where various metallic carbides can form, causing a depletion of some alloying elements
in a localized area, reducing the corrosion resistance of the material.

These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables.

Service Precautions:
Nickel alloys are selected in nuclear plant conditions due to their excellent corrosion
resistance. However, some nickel alloys are susceptible to stress corrosion cracking in an
environment where water-soluble chloride salts, other halogen compounds, and high
oxygen contents can be concentrated. Halogens include fluorine, chlorine, bromine,
iodine, and astatine. Sources of these compounds are insulation, markers, paints, oils,
adhesives, adhesive tape, or gaskets. Another source of halogens may be water that is
used for cleaning or hydrostatic testing. The effect of halogens is magnified in the
presence of high oxygen contents. Concentrating mechanisms such as crevices and dead
legs should be avoided where possible.

13-2
SA-351/SA351M, Grade CN3MN
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-containing
Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, Grade CN3MN J94651 (1) 45 --
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 23.5 25.5
Chromium 20.0 22.0
Molybdenum 6.0 7.0
Nitrogen 0.18 0.26
Copper 0.75 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80,000 psi (550 MPa) 38,000 psi (260 MPa) 35

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution heat treatment (2100F/1150C or higher followed
by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pumps, valves and heavy-section pipe
fittings where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-3
SB-165, N04400
Specification for Nickel-Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Seamless Pipe and Tube

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-165, N04400 (1) N04400 42 --
Note: (1) Specification covers cold-worked pipe and tube

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Nickel 63 min
Copper 28.0 34.0
Iron 2.5 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Carbon 0.3 max
Silicon 0.5 max
Sulfur 0.024 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
70,000 psi (480 MPa) (1) 28,000 psi (195 MPa) (1) 35 (1)
70,000 psi (480 MPa) (2) 25,000 psi (170 MPa) (2) 35 (2)
85000 psi (585 MPa) (3) 55,000 psi (380 MPa) (3) 15 (3)
Notes:
(1) Annealed, 5 in. (127 mm) OD
(2) Annealed, > 5 in. (127 mm) OD
(3) Stress Relieved

Material Heat Treatment:


Annealing Soft, with a dull matte finish Approx. 1600F (870C)54
Stress Relief Thin, light- to medium-dark surface Below Annealing Temperature

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-4
SB-366 WP20CB
Specification for Factory-Made Wrought Nickel and Nickel Alloy Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-366 WP20CB N08020 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %) (1)


Carbon 0.07 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 32.00 38.00
Chromium 19.00 21.00
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00
Copper 3.00 4.00
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (8 X C) min, 1.00 max
Iron Remainder
Note: (1) Fittings may be made from Alloy N08020 from Specifications SB-464, SB-468, or SB-729 (pipe or
tube); SB-463 (plate, sheet, or strip); or SB-472, SB-473, or SB-462 (Bar Forging)

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80 ksi (551 MPa) 35 ksi (241 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Stabilizing-annealing heat treatment (1800-1850F/982-


1010C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-5
SB-423 N08825
Specification for Nickel-Iron-Chromium-Molybdenum-Copper Alloy (N08825 and N08221)
Seamless Pipe and Tube

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-423 N08825 N08825 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Nickel 38.0 46.0
Chromium 19.5 23.5
Iron 22.0 min
Manganese 1.0 max
Carbon 0.05 max
Copper 1.5 3.0
Silicon 0.5 max
Sulfur 0.03 max
Aluminum 0.2 max
Titanium 0.6 1.2
Molybdenum 2.5 3.5

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
75,000 psi (517 MPa) (1) 25,000 psi (172 MPa) (1) 30 (1)
85,000 psi (586 MPa) (2) 35,000 psi (241 MPa) (2) 30 (2)
Not required (3) Not required (3) Not required (3)
Notes:
(1) Hot-finished annealed
(2) Cold-worked annealed
(3) Hot-forming quality (hot-finished or cold-drawn annealed)

Material Heat Treatment:


Annealing Approx. 1725F (940C)55

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-6
SB-444 N06625
Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum-Columbium Alloy (N06625) Pipe and Tube

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-444 N06625 N06625 43 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.10 max
Manganese 0.50 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Phosphorus 0.015 max
Sulfur 0.015 max
Chromium 20.0 23.0
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum 3.15 4.15
Cobalt 1.0 max (if determined)
Molybdenum 8.0 10.0
Iron 5.0 max
Aluminum 0.40 max
Titanium 0.40 max
Nickel 58.0 min

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
120,000 psi (827 MPa) (1) 60,000 psi (414 MPa) (1) 30 (1)
100,000 psi (690 MPa) (2) 40,000 psi (276 MPa) (2) 30 (2)
Notes:
(1) Annealed
(2) Solution annealed

Material Heat Treatment:


Annealing 1600F (871C) min.
Solution annealed - 2000F (1093C) min.

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-7
SB-462, N08367
Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N08020, UNS N08024, UNS N08026, and UNS
N08367 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for Corrosive High-
Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-462, N08367 N08367 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 23.50 - 25.50
Chromium 20.00 - 22.00
Molybdenum 6.00 - 7.00
Copper 0.75 max
Nitrogen 0.18 - 0.25
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min) Reduction of Area (%)
95 ksi (655 MPa) 45 ksi (310 MPa) 30 50

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution annealed heat treatment. (2150F/1180C


minimum followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used where high corrosion resistance is important. This alloy is
commonly referred to as AL-6XN.

Service: Used in applications where severe corrosion conditions may exist, particularly at high
temperatures.

13-8
SB-464
Specification for Welded UNS N08020, UNS N08024, and UNS N08026 Alloy Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-464 N08020 N08020 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.07 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 32.00 38.00
Chromium 19.00 21.00
Molybdenum 2.00 3.00
Copper 3.00 4.00
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum (8 X C) min, 1.00 max
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80 ksi (551 MPa) 35 ksi (241 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Stabilizing-annealing heat treatment (1800-1850F/982-


1010C minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-9
SB-464
Specification for Welded UNS N08020, UNS N08024, and UNS N08026 Alloy Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-464 N08024 N08024 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.035 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Nickel 35.00 40.00
Chromium 22.50 25.00
Molybdenum 3.50 5.00
Copper 0.50 1.50
Columbium (Nb) + Tantalum 0.15 0.35
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80 ksi (551 MPa) 35 ksi (241 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Annealing heat treatment (1925-1975F/1052-1079C


minimum).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-10
SB-464
Specification for Welded UNS N08020, UNS N08024, and UNS N08026 Alloy Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-464 N08026 N08026 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %) (1)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorus 0.03 max
Sulfur 0.03 max
Silicon 0.50 max
Nickel 33.00 37.20
Chromium 22.00 26.00
Molybdenum 5.00 6.70
Copper 2.00 4.00
Nitrogen 0.10 0.16
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
80 ksi (551 MPa) 35 ksi (241 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution-annealing heat treatment (2050-2200F/1121-


1204C minimum followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used broadly in construction of pressure vessels, storage tanks and
piping where corrosion resistance is important.

Service: Used in applications where cleanliness and an absence of corrosion products is


important, such as in primary nuclear systems.

13-11
SB-675, N08367
Specification for UNS N08366 and UNS N08367 Welded Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-675, N08367 N08367 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 23.50 - 25.50
Chromium 20.00 - 22.00
Molybdenum 6.00 - 7.00
Copper 0.75 max
Nitrogen 0.18 - 0.25
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
95 ksi (655 MPa) 45 ksi (310 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution annealed heat treatment. (2025F/1105C


minimum followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used where high corrosion resistance is important. This alloy is
commonly referred to as AL-6XN.

Service: Used in applications where severe corrosion conditions may exist, particularly at high
temperatures.

13-12
SB-690, N08367
Specification for Iron-Nickel-Chromium-Molybdenum Alloys (UNS N08366 and UNS
N08367) Seamless Pipe and Tube

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SB-690, N08367 N08367 45 --

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorus 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 23.50 - 25.50
Chromium 20.00 - 22.00
Molybdenum 6.00 - 7.00
Copper 0.75 max
Nitrogen 0.18 - 0.25
Iron Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
104 ksi (717 MPa) 46 ksi (317 MPa) 30

Required Material Heat Treatment: Annealing heat treatment. (Temperature not stated in
specification (typically 2150F/1180C minimum) followed by rapid cooling).

Common Applications: Used where high corrosion resistance is important. This alloy is
commonly referred to as AL-6XN.

Service: Used in applications where severe corrosion conditions may exist, particularly at high
temperatures.

13-13
14
NICKEL ALLOY STEELS (P NO. 9A & 9B)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Nickel alloy steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Fuel gas torch
Plasma torch
Water jet

When nickel alloy steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, a light grinding may be
required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. Preheat
should be considered when thermal cutting is used on higher strength carbon steels. If
the thermally shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized
surface layer should be totally removed and some sub-surface material may also require
removal.

Welding:
Nickel alloy steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding
processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional
processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high
volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of the process is
based on a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

14-1
Availability of welding materials

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and chemical
composition. The welding procedure specification (WPS) being used should in general
provide direction on the filler metal to be used.

The requirements for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) vary within the
different codes but generally follow the requirements for carbon steel. Higher preheat is
frequently required and thickness exemption for PWHT are somewhat more restrictive,
however. The specific code requirements should be determined. The preheat and PWHT
requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables. The requirements of the WPS must be followed
which may result in the need to do preheat and/or PWHT even if the code of record does
not require it.

14-2
SA-333/SA-333M, Grade 9
Specification for Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-333, Gr. 9 K22035 9A 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.20 max
Manganese 0.40 1.06
Phosphorus 0.025 max
Sulfur 0.025 max
Nickel 1.60 2.24
Copper 0.75 1.25

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.61

Material Properties
% Elongation Approx. Lower
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
63,000 psi (435 MPa) 46,000 psi (315 MPa) 28 (1) 1420F (770C)
Note: (1) For most test specimens (see Material Specification for specific requirements)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the
microstructure. (See material specification.)

Common Applications: SA-333 Grade 9 pipe has limited usage within nuclear power plants. It
may be used for pressure applications in secondary systems and classed systems where low
service temperatures may be a factor.

14-3
SA-350/SA-350M LF3
Specification for Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Forgings, Requiring Notch Toughness
Testing for Piping Components

Materials Covered
UNS P/S
Material Specification(s) Group No.
Number No.
SA-350, LF3 K32025 9B 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.20 max
Manganese 0.90 max
Phosphorus 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 0.20 - 0.35 [Note (1)]
Copper 0.40 max
Nickel 3.3 - 3.7
Chromium 0.30 max [Note (2)]
Molybdenum 0.12 max [Note (2)]
Columbium 0.02 max
Vanadium 0.03 max
NOTES:
General: Materials manufactured before 4/1996 may have different chemical composition
requirements
(1) A further limitation on the Si content may be the result of Supplemental requirements (See
material specification)
(2) The sum of chromium and molybdenum shall not exceed 0.32%

Maximum Calculated Carbon Equivalent = 0.75

Material Properties
Yield Charpy
Tensile % Elongation Approx. Lower
Strength V-Notch
Strength (min) TransformationTemperature (Ac1)
(min) (Ave) (2)
15 ft-lbs
70-95 ksi at
37.5 ksi
(485-655 30 (1) -150F (1420)F ((770)C)
(260 MPa)
MPa) 20 J at
-101.1C
Notes:
(1) For strip test specimen thickness 5/16 in. (see Material Specification for other test specimen
requirements)
(2) For Standard Size (10mm x 10mm) Specimens

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment required for the control of the
microstructure. (See material specification.)

Common Applications: SA-350, Gr. LF3 forgings are commonly used for pressure applications
in secondary systems and classed systems where low service temperatures may be a factor.

14-4
15
DUPLEX STAINLESS STEELS (P NO. 10H)

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Duplex stainless steels may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

When duplex stainless steels are cut or shaped by thermal methods, grinding may be
required to remove the highly oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. If the
thermally shaped or cut surface is to be left without further operations, the oxidized
surface layer should be totally removed.

Caution is required to avoid depositing ferritic carbon or low alloy steel particles on the
surface of the duplex stainless steels. Such particles may result in surface rusting or local
pitting.

Welding:
Duplex stainless steels may be welded by most welding processes. Typical welding
processes used for repair are SMAW and GTAW. These processes and the additional
processes of GMAW, FCAW, PAW, and SAW may also be used for fabrication or high
volume repairs, or to address specific welding issues. The selection of the process is
based on a large number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility

15-1
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

The filler metals used for welding should be selected based on both strength and
chemical composition. Duplex stainless steels in the P No. 10H category have
compositions which are formulated to yield approximately a 50-50 percent ratio of
austenitic and ferritic structures at room temperatures after solidification. The filler
metals selected should also have a similar composition but may have a slightly higher
nickel content to compensate for losses during welding. The welding procedure
specification (WPS) being used should in general provide direction on the filler metal to
be used. The selection of filler metals for joints between different grades of duplex
stainless steels can be a match of either grade or may be some intermediate composition.

There is no requirement for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) in the codes
other than a minimum 50F (10C). However there are often limits placed on the
temperature of the material during the welding, called the interpass temperature. The
interpass temperature is typically limited to 300F (150C) to ensure that cooling will be
rapid enough to result in the expected microstructure. If PWHT is required, it is normally
a solution heat treatment followed by quenching. This type of heat treatment is not
normally possible during in-place repairs or replacements so steps to accomplish the
desired properties and microstructure in the as-welded condition need to be taken.

These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables.

Service Precautions:
Duplex stainless steels perform well in an environment where water-soluble chloride salts
and other halogen compounds can be concentrated. This material is also useful where
pitting resistance or where stress corrosion cracking may be a problem for other steels.

15-2
SA-182/SA-182M, F50
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F50 S31200 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 5.5 6.5
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 1.2 2.0
Nitrogen 0.14 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
100 - 130 ksi (690 - 900
65 ksi (450 MPa) 25.0
MPa)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution Heat Treatment and Quench (1925F/1050C min.
followed by liquid quench to below 500F/260C).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-3
SA-182/SA-182M, F51
Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves for
High-Temperature Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-182, F51 S31803 (1) 10H 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 4.5 6.5
Chromium 21.0 23.0
Molybdenum 2.5 3.5
Nitrogen 0.08 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
90 ksi (620 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25.0

Required Material Heat Treatment: Solution Heat Treatment and Quench (1870F/1020C min.
followed by liquid quench to below 500F/260C).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-4
SA-351/SA-351M, CD4MCu
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-containing
Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, CD4MCu J93370 (1) 10H 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.04 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.04 max
Sulfur 0.04 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 4.75 6.00
Chromium 24.5 26.5
Molybdenum 1.75 2.25
Copper 2.75 3.25

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
100 ksi (690 MPa) 70 ksi (485 MPa) 16.0

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1900F/1040C min. followed by water
quench or other rapid cooling).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-5
SA-351/SA-351M, CE8MN
Specification for Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for Pressure-containing
Parts

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-351, CE8MN J93345 (1) 10H 1
Note: (1) UNS No. assigned per ASME Section IX.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.00 max
Nickel 8.0 11.0
Chromium 22.5 25.5
Molybdenum 3.0 4.5
Nitrogen 0.10 0.30

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
95 ksi (655 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25.0

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (2050F/1120C min. followed by water
quench or other rapid cooling).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-6
SA-789/SA-789M, S31200
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S31200 S31200 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 5.50 6.50
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 1.20 2.00
Nitrogen 0.14 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
100 ksi (690 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25 280 --

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1920-2010F/1050-1100C followed by


water quench).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-7
SA-789/SA-789M, S31260
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S31260 S31260 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Nickel 5.50 7.50
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.50
Nitrogen 0.10 0.30
Copper 0.20 0.80
Tungsten 0.10 0.50

Material Properties
% Elongation Hardness (max)
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
100 ksi (690 MPa) (1) 65 ksi (450 MPa) (1) 25 (1) 290 30.5
Note: (1) Prior to A789-87, TS = 92 ksi min., ys = 54 ksi min., and elongation = 30% min.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1870-2010F/1020-1100C followed by


water quench).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-8
SA-789 /SA-789M, S31500
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S31500 S31500 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.20 2.00
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.40 2.00
Nickel 4.25 5.25
Chromium 18.0 19.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.00
Nitrogen 0.05 0.1

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
92 ksi (630 MPa) 64 ksi (440 MPa) 30 290 30.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1800-1900F/980-1040C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-9
SA-789 /SA-789M, S31803
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S31803 S31803 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 4.50 6.50
Chromium 21.0 23.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.50
Nitrogen 0.08 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
90 ksi (620 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25 290 30.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1870-2010F/1020-1100C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-10
SA-789 /SA-789M, S32304
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S32304 S32304 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.50 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 3.0 5.5
Chromium 21.5 24.5
Molybdenum 0.05 0.60
Nitrogen 0.05 0.20
Copper 0.05 0.60

Material Properties
Outside Tensile Strength Yield Strength % Elongation Hardness (max)
Diameter (min) (min) (min) Brinell Rockwell C
1 in. (25 100 ksi (690
65 ksi (450 MPa) 25 -- --
mm) MPa)
> 1 in. (25
87 ksi (600 MPa) 58 ksi (400 MPa) 25 290 30.5
mm)

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1700-1920F/925-1050C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-11
SA-789 /SA-789M, S32550
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S32550 S32550 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.040 max
Manganese 1.5 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 4.50 6.50
Chromium 24.0 27.0
Molybdenum 2.90 3.90
Nitrogen 0.10 0.25
Copper 1.5 2.5

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
110 ksi (760 MPa) 80 ksi (550 MPa) 15 297 31.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1900F/1040C min. followed by water
quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-12
SA-789 /SA-789M, S32750
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S32750 S32750 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.2 max
Phosphorous 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 0.8 max
Nickel 6.0 8.0
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 3.0 5.0
Nitrogen 0.24 0.32
Copper 0.5 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
116 ksi (800 MPa) 80 ksi (550 MPa) 15 310 32

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1880-2060F/1025-1125C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-13
SA-789 /SA-789M, S32900
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S32900 S32900 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Nickel 2.50 5.00
Chromium 23.00 28.00
Molybdenum 1.00 2.00

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
90 ksi (620 MPa) 70 ksi (485 MPa) 20 271 28

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1700-1750F/925-955C followed by water


quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-14
SA-789 /SA-789M, S32950
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for
General Service

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-789, S32950 S32950 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Nickel 3.50 5.20
Chromium 26.00 29.00
Molybdenum 1.00 2.50
Nitrogen 0.15 0.35

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
100 ksi (690 MPa)
70 ksi (480 MPa) 20 290 30.5
(1)
Note: (1) Prior to A789-89, TS = 90 ksi min.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1820-1880F/990-1025C followed by air


cooling).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-15
SA-790/SA-790M, S31200
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S31200 S31200 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Phosphorous 0.045 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 5.50 6.50
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 1.20 2.00
Nitrogen 0.14 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
100 ksi (690 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25 280 --

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1920-2010F/1050-1100C followed by


water quench).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-16
SA-790/SA-790M, S31260
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S31260 S31260 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Nickel 5.50 7.50
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.50
Nitrogen 0.10 0.30
Copper 0.20 0.80
Tungsten 0.10 0.50

Material Properties

Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)

100 ksi (690 MPa) (1) 65 ksi (450 MPa) (1) 25 (1)
Note: (1) Prior to A790-87, TS = 92 ksi min., ys = 54 ksi min., and elongation = 30% min.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1870-2010F/1020-1100C followed by


water quench).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-17
SA-790/SA-790M, S31500
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S31500 S31500 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.20 2.00
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.40 2.00
Nickel 4.25 5.25
Chromium 18.0 19.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.00
Nitrogen 0.05 0.10

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
92 ksi (630 MPa) 64 ksi (440 MPa) 30 290 30.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1800-1900F/980-1040C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-18
SA-790/SA-790M, S31803
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S31803 S31803 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.0 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 4.50 6.50
Chromium 21.0 23.0
Molybdenum 2.50 3.50
Nitrogen 0.08 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
90 ksi (620 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 25 290 30.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1870-2010F/1020-1100C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-19
SA-790/SA-790M, S32304
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S32304 S32304 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.50 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.040 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 3.0 5.5
Chromium 21.5 24.5
Molybdenum 0.05 0.60
Nitrogen 0.05 0.20
Copper 0.05 0.60

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
87 ksi (600 MPa) 58 ksi (400 MPa) 25 290 30.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1700-1920F/925-1050C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-20
SA-790/SA-790M, S32550
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S32550 S32550 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.040 max
Manganese 1.5 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 4.50 6.50
Chromium 24.0 27.0
Molybdenum 2.90 3.90
Nitrogen 0.10 0.25
Copper 1.5 2.5

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
110 ksi (760 MPa) 80 ksi (550 MPa) 15 297 31.5

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1900F/1040C min. followed by water
quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-21
SA-790/SA-790M, S32750
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S32750 S32750 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 1.2 max
Phosphorous 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 0.8 max
Nickel 6.0 8.0
Chromium 24.0 26.0
Molybdenum 3.0 5.0
Nitrogen 0.24 0.32
Copper 0.5 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
116 ksi (800 MPa) 80 ksi (550 MPa) 15 310 32

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1880-2060F/1025-1125C followed by


water quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-22
SA-790/SA-790M, S32900
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S32900 S32900 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.08 max
Manganese 1.00 max
Phosphorous 0.040 max
Sulfur 0.030 max
Silicon 0.75 max
Nickel 2.50 5.00
Chromium 23.00 28.00
Molybdenum 1.00 2.00

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
90 ksi (620 MPa) 70 ksi (485 MPa) 20 271 28

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1700-1750F/925-955C followed by water


quench or rapid cooling in air).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-23
SA-790/SA-790M, S32950
Specification for Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-790, S32950 S32950 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.03 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.035 max
Sulfur 0.010 max
Silicon 0.60 max
Nickel 3.50 5.20
Chromium 26.00 29.00
Molybdenum 1.00 2.50
Nitrogen 0.15 0.35

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Hardness (max)
Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min)
(min) Brinell Rockwell C
100 ksi (690 MPa)
70 ksi (480 MPa) 20 290 30.5
(1)
Note: (1) Prior to A790-89, TS = 90 ksi min.

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1820-1880F/990-1025C followed by air


cooling).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-24
SA-815/SA-815M, S31803
Specification for Wrought Ferritic, Ferritic/Austenitic, and Martensitic Stainless Steel
Piping Fittings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S Group
Material Specification(s)
Number No. No.
SA-815, S31803 S31803 10H 1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Carbon 0.030 max
Manganese 2.00 max
Phosphorous 0.030 max
Sulfur 0.020 max
Silicon 1.0 max
Nickel 4.5 6.5
Chromium 21.0 23.0
Molybdenum 2.5 3.5
Nitrogen 0.08 0.20

Material Properties
Tensile Strength (min) Yield Strength (min) % Elongation (min) Brinell Hardness
90 ksi (620 MPa) 65 ksi (450 MPa) 20.0 290

Required Material Heat Treatment: Heat treatment (1870-2010F/1020-1100C followed by


water quench or other rapid cooling).

Service: Ferritic/austenitic (duplex) stainless steels are used in Service Water Systems where
the potential for corrosion or fouling exists due to containing essentially untreated water.

15-25
16
COPPER ALLOYS (P NOS. 31, 32, 33, & 107
(BRAZING))

The following are general statements that apply to this class of materials. Issues that
apply to specific materials described in this chapter are detailed within the description of
the material specification, type, or grade of the material. There may be specific
requirements that apply to these materials during repair or fabrication that are outside of
the scope of this information, such as the requirements of the design, the welding
procedures, the heat treatment, or other special process procedures that are to be applied.

Cutting Methods:
Copper alloys may be cut or shaped by many methods, such as:

Sawing
Abrasive grinding or cut-off
Carbon arc
Machining
Plasma torch
Water jet

When copper alloys are cut or shaped by thermal methods, grinding is required to remove
the oxidized surface layer prior to other operations. If the thermally shaped or cut surface
is to be left without further operations, the oxidized surface layer should be totally
removed.

Welding:
Copper alloys may be welded by several welding processes. If welded the process used
for repair or replacement is generally GTAW. This process and the additional processes
of GMAW or PAW may also be used. The selection of the process is based on a large
number of factors, which include:

Quality required
Joint type and location
Position of weld
Volume of welding
Ease of set up
Accessibility
Purpose of weld (e.g., strength, cladding)
Welding procedure availability

16-1
The filler metals used for welding should be selected based primarily on chemical
composition. Copper alloys have a number of different principle alloying elements that
need to be essentially matched to provide similar properties of strength, corrosion
resistance, thermal conductivity, and electrical conductivity.

There is no requirement for preheat and postweld heat treatment (PWHT) in the codes
other than a minimum 50F (10C). However it is often necessary to preheat to
counteract the very high thermal conductivity of copper alloys and to avoid non-fusion
discontinuities. PWHT may be required after cold working to recover the desired
ductility. Since copper alloys are often cold worked to different degrees in order to
achieve higher strength, the welding operation will effectively anneal the copper alloys
on a local basis, decreasing the overall strength of the weldment.

These requirements are also affected by the WPS since the qualification of the procedure
includes preheat and PWHT variables.

Brazing and Soldering:


Brazing or soldering are often the preferred joining methods for copper alloys. Properly
done, these processes can achieve joint strength equal to the base metal strength. As in
welding, the brazing process is considered a special process and requires qualification
per code requirements. The soldering process may also require some qualification but
this qualification is not covered in ASME Section IX, as is the brazing qualifications. In
nuclear repair applications, torch brazing is most often used.

Brazing is selected in service situations where elevated temperatures could be


encountered (such as within nuclear plant containments). Soldering may be selected
when the service temperature is relatively low.

16-2
SB-42 C10200
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SB-42 C10200 C10200 31/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.95 min

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Pipe Size, in. Tensile Strength Yield Strength
Standard Condition (1)
O61 Annealed All 30 ksi 9 ksi
H80 Hard Drawn 1/8 2, incl. 45 ksi 40 ksi
H55 Light Drawn 2 12, incl. 36 ksi 30 ksi
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-3
SB-42 C12000
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SB-42 C12000 C12000 31/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.90 min
Phosphorus 0.004 0.012

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Pipe Size, in. Tensile Strength Yield Strength
Standard Condition (1)
O61 Annealed All 30 ksi 9 ksi
H80 Hard Drawn 1/8 2, incl. 45 ksi 40 ksi
H55 Light Drawn 2 12, incl. 36 ksi 30 ksi
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-4
SB-42 C12200
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SB-42 C12200 C12200 31/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.9 min
Phosphorus 0.015 0.40

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Pipe Size, in. Tensile Strength Yield Strength
Standard Condition (1)
O61 Annealed All 30 ksi 9 ksi
H80 Hard Drawn 1/8 2, incl. 45 ksi 40 ksi
H55 Light Drawn 2 12, incl. 36 ksi 30 ksi
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-5
SB-61 C92200
Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S
Material Specification(s) Group No.
Number No.
107
SB-61, C92200 C92200 --
(1)
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 86.0 90.0 (1)
Tin 5.5 6.5
Lead 1.0 2.0
Zinc 3.0 5.0
Nickel (incl. Cobalt) 1.0 max
Iron 0.25 max
Antimony 0.25 max
Sulfur 0.05 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Aluminum 0.005 max
Silicon 0.005 max
Note: (1) For copper minimum, copper may include nickel content

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation, %
34 ksi 16 ksi 24

16-6
SB-62, C83600
Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

Materials Covered
UNS P/S
Material Specification(s) Group No.
Number No.
107
SB-62, C83600 C83600 --
(1)
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 84.0 86.0 (1)
Tin 4.0 6.0
Lead 4.0 6.0
Zinc 4.0 6.0
Nickel (incl. Cobalt) 1.0 max
Iron 0.30 max
Antimony 0.25 max
Sulfur 0.08 max
Phosphorus 0.05 max
Aluminum 0.005 max
Silicon 0.005 max
Note: (1) For copper minimum, copper may include nickel content

Material Properties
Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation, %
30 ksi (205 MPa) 14 ksi (95 MPa) 20

16-7
B-68-99 C10200
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper, Bright Annealed

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-68 C10200 S31/S107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 99.95 min
Oxygen 10 ppm max

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Tensile Strength Elongation, %
Standard Condition (1)
O50 Light Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
O60 Soft Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-8
B-68-99 C12000
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper, Bright Annealed

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-68 C12000 C12000 S31/S107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.90 min
Phosphorus 0.004 0.012

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Tensile Strength Elongation, %
Standard Condition (1)
O50 Light Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
O60 Soft Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-9
B-68-99 C12200
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper, Bright Annealed

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-68 C12200 C12200 S31/S107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.9 min
Phosphorus 0.015 0.040

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Tensile Strength Elongation, %
Standard Condition (1)
O50 Light Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
O60 Soft Annealed 30 ksi (210 MPa) 40
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-10
SB-75 C10200
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
SB-75 C10200 C10200 31/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 99.95 min

Material Properties
Temper Designation Diameter/Wall Rockwell Tensile Yield
Standard Condition (1) Thickness Hardness/Scale Strength Strength, min
H55 Light Drawn All 30 60/30T 36 47 ksi 30 ksi
H58 Drawn All 30 min/30T 36 ksi min 30 ksi
4 in. Dia./
H80 Hard Drawn 0.020 0.250 55 min/30T 45 ksi min 40 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 65 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Light
O50 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
55 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 60 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Soft
O60 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
50 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-11
SB-75 C12000
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SB-75 C12000 C12000 31/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.90 min
Phosphorus 0.004 0.012

Material Properties
Temper Designation Diameter/Wall Rockwell Tensile Yield
Standard Condition (1) Thickness Hardness/Scale Strength Strength, min
H55 Light Drawn All 30 60/30T 36 47 ksi 30 ksi
H58 Drawn All 30 min/30T 36 ksi min 30 ksi
4 in. Dia./
H80 Hard Drawn 0.020 0.250 55 min/30T 45 ksi min 40 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 65 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Light
O50 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
55 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 60 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Soft
O60 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
50 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-12
SB-75 C12200
Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
SB-75 C12200 C12200 31/107*** --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.9 min
Phosphorus 0.015 0.040

Material Properties
Temper Designation Diameter/Wall Rockwell Tensile Yield
Standard Condition (1) Thickness Hardness/Scale Strength Strength, min
H55 Light Drawn All 30 60/30T 36 47 ksi 30 ksi
H58 Drawn All 30 min/30T 36 ksi min 30 ksi
4 in. Dia./
H80 Hard Drawn 0.020 0.250 55 min/30T 45 ksi min 40 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 65 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Light
O50 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
55 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
All Dia./0.015
0.035 in. 60 max/15T 30 ksi min 9 ksi
Soft
O60 thickness
Annealed
All Dia./ 0.035
50 max/F 30 ksi min 9 ksi
in. thickness
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-13
B-88-99 C12200
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-88 C12200 C12200 S31/S107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.9 min
Phosphorus 0.015 0.040

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Tensile Strength, min Rockwell Hardness/Scale
Standard Condition
O50 Light Annealed 30 ksi (200 MPa) 55 max/F
O60 Soft Annealed 30 ksi (200 MPa) 50 max/F
H58 Drawn 36 ksi (250 MPa) 30 min/30T
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-14
SB-98/SB-98M, C65100
Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS Number P/S No. Group No.
SB-98 C65100 C65100 33/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 96.0 min
Lead 0.05 max
Iron 0.8 max
Zinc 1.5 max
Manganese 0.7 max
Silicon 0.8 2.0

Material Properties
Temper Designation Tensile Strength, Elongation,
Yield Strength, min
Standard Condition (2) min %
O60 Soft Annealed 40 ksi (275 MPa) 12 ksi (85 MPa) 30 min
11 12 min
H02 Half Hard 55 ksi (380 MPa) 20 ksi (140 MPa)
(1)
8 10 min
H04 Hard 65 ksi (450 MPa) 35 ksi (240 MPa)
(1)
75 85 ksi (515 40 55 ksi (275
H06 Extra-Hard 6 8 min (1)
585 MPa) (1) 380 MPa) (1)
Notes:
(1) Minimum value is dependant on shape and thickness see specification
(2) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work hardening.
When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the annealed
condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-15
SB-98/SB-98M, C65500
Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS Number P/S No. Group No.
SB-98 C65500 C65500 33/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 94.8 min
Lead 0.05 max
Iron 0.8 max
Zinc 1.5 max
Manganese 0.50 1.3
Silicon 2.8 3.8
Nickel 0.6 max

Material Properties
Temper Designation Tensile Strength, Elongation,
Yield Strength, min
Standard Condition (2) min %
O60 Soft Annealed 52 ksi (360 MPa) 15 ksi (105 MPa) 35 min
H01 Quarter-Hard 55 ksi (380 MPa) 24 ksi (165 MPa) 25 min
H02 Half Hard 70 ksi (485 MPa) 38 ksi (260 MPa) 20 min
55 - 90 ksi (380 - 615 24 - 55 ksi (165 8 27 min
H04 Hard
MPa) (1) 380 MPa) (1) (1)
H06 Extra-Hard 100 ksi (690 MPa) 55 ksi (380 MPa) 7 min
Notes:
(1) Minimum value is dependant on shape and thickness see specification
(2) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work hardening.
When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the annealed
condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-16
SB-98/SB-98M, C66100
Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes

Materials Covered
Material Specification(s) UNS Number P/S No. Group No.
SB-98 C66100 C66100 33/107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 94.0 min
Lead 0.02 0.8
Iron 0.25 max
Zinc 1.5 max
Manganese 1.5 max
Silicon 2.8 3.5

Material Properties
Temper Designation Tensile Strength, Elongation,
Yield Strength, min
Standard Condition (2) min %
O60 Soft Annealed 52 ksi (360 MPa) 15 ksi (105 MPa) 35 min
H01 Quarter-Hard 55 ksi (380 MPa) 24 ksi (165 MPa) 25 min
H02 Half Hard 70 ksi (485 MPa) 38 ksi (260 MPa) 20 min
55 - 90 ksi (380 - 615 24 - 55 ksi (165 8 27 min
H04 Hard
MPa) (1) 380 MPa) (1) (1)
H06 Extra-Hard 100 ksi (690 MPa) 55 ksi (380 MPa) 7 min
Notes:
(1) Minimum value is dependant on shape and thickness see specification
(2) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work hardening.
When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the annealed
condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-17
B-280-99 C12200
Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration
Field Service

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
S31/S107
B-280 C12200 C12200 --
(1)
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 99.9 min
Phosphorus 0.015 0.040

Material Properties
Temper Designation
Tensile Strength, min Elongation, %
Standard Condition
O60 Soft Annealed 30 ksi (205 MPa) 40 min
H58 Drawn 36 ksi (250 MPa) --
Note: (1) Copper alloys are often provided in several strength levels resulting from work
hardening. When the work hardened condition is subsequently welded, the strength of the
annealed condition is used for design. See the allowable stress tables for the code being used.

16-18
SB-283 C11000
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed)

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-283 C11000 C11000 31/107 (1) (2) --
Notes:
(1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.
(2) P No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper (incl. Silver) 99.90 min

Material Properties
Tensile Strength 33 ksi min (1)
Note: (1) Value not specified in SB-283, taken from Section IX minimum for Procedure
Qualification

16-19
SB-283 C37700
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed)

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
B-283 C37700 C37700 S107 (1) --
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 58.0 61.0
Lead 1.5 2.5
Iron 0.30 max
Zinc Remainder

Material Properties
Section Thickness Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation, %
1 in. 50 ksi (345 MPa) 18 ksi (124 MPa) 25
> 1 in. 46 ksi (317 MPa) 15 ksi (103 MPa) 30

16-20
SB-283 C46400
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed)

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
32/107 (1)
B-283 C46400 C46400 --
(2)
Notes:
(1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.
(2) P No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 59.0 62.0
Lead 0.20 max
Tin 0.50 1.0
Iron 0.10 max
Zinc Remainder

Material Properties
Section Thickness Tensile Strength Yield Strength Elongation, %
All 52 ksi (358 MPa) 22 ksi (152 MPa) 25

16-21
SB-283 C65500
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed)

Materials Covered
UNS Group
Material Specification(s) P/S No.
Number No.
33/107 (1)
B-283 C65500 C65500 --
(2)
Notes:
(1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.
(2) P No. assigned per ASME Section IX, Para. QW-420.1

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper Remainder
Lead 0.05 max
Iron 0.8 max
Nickel (incl. Cobalt) 0.6 max
Silicon 2.8 3.8
Manganese 0.50 1.3
Zinc 1.5 max

Material Properties
Tensile Strength 52 ksi min (1)
Note: (1) Value not specified in SB-283, taken from Section IX Table QW/QB-422 minimum TS for
Welding Procedure Qualification

16-22
SB-283 C67500
Specification for Copper and Copper-Alloy Die Forgings (Hot-Pressed)

Materials Covered
UNS
Material Specification(s) P/S No. Group No.
Number
S32/S107
B-283 C67500 C67500 --
(1)
Note: (1) P or S Nos. above 100 are Brazing Nos.

Chemical Composition (per specification, %)


Copper 57.0 60.0
Lead 0.20 max
Tin 0.50 1.5
Iron 0.8 2.0
Aluminum 0.25 max
Manganese 0.05 0.50
Zinc Remainder

Material Properties
Tensile Strength 72 ksi min (1)
Note: (1) Value not specified in SB-283, taken from Section IX minimum for Procedure
Qualification

16-23
SECTION III PROCESSES
17
METAL REMOVAL AND CUTTING PROCESSES

Metal can be removed by a variety of processes, including oxygen-fuel gas cutting,


plasma arc cutting, carbon-arc gouging and cutting, machining, grinding (including
flapping), water jet cutting and gouging, and electrical discharge machining. However,
the effect of the process on the metal must be considered in order to be successful.

THERMAL PROCESSES56 57

Simply put, the thermal processes achieve metal removal by localized burning, melting,
or vaporizing the material. This requires that the adjacent surface area must also be
heated to a high temperature; potentially causing a local affect on the properties of the
material through changes in the microstructure and in residual stresses. They may also
result in surface oxides that may need to be removed prior to subsequent welding or
brazing. Specific circumstances will dictate the need for removal of the surface oxides
and/or the need to address the local material properties. The need to remove surface
oxides would be determined based on the thickness and type of remaining oxides, the
operations and processes to be performed (in some cases thin oxide layers may not be
detrimental), appearance requirements, and the service environment. Likewise, if the
local properties of the material at the cut may be degraded, that material may either need
to be removed or heat treated if left in the as-cut condition (if this is a concern,
nonthermal processes should be considered).

Generally the common thermal processes include oxygen-fuel gas cutting, plasma arc
cutting, and carbon-arc gouging and cutting. There are variations on these processes for
specific applications or materials that may involve the injection of metallic powders,
fluxes, or consumable cutting tips, but these variations are not often used in nuclear repair
activities. Likewise, there are also other thermal cutting processes such as laser beam
cutting or the use of exothermic cutting electrodes.

When used manually, the thermal cutting processes require varying levels of skill to
make satisfactory cuts. Significant damage to a component can be done using untrained
personnel. This suggests that the thermal cutting processes should be treated as a
special process (see Section I, Chapters 4 & 5) to the degree that satisfactory cuts can
be achieved with confidence.

17-1
Oxygen-Fuel Gas Cutting and Gouging

The oxygen-fuel gas process uses heat generated by an oxyfuel gas flame. Essentially
pure oxygen is always used but the fuel gas may be one of several different alternatives.
The alternatives include acetylene (the most common), natural gas, propane, and methyl-
acetylene-propadiene (MAPP) fuel gases. The torch apparatus may be slightly different
for the different fuel gas alternatives but the operation is essentially the same. The torch
provides both a preheating flame and an oxygen jet. The preheating flame raises the
metal up to its kindling temperature where it will burn in the presence of pure oxygen.
At this temperature, a jet of pure oxygen is introduced which rapidly oxidizes the metal
and ejects the molten material from the location, creating the cut. The adjacent material
is highly oxidized but may be a thin layer if the process is properly controlled.

This process is commonly used for carbon or low alloy steels. Mild carbon steels can be
cut up to a significant thickness (several inches is not uncommon) but greater thicknesses
may require the used of mechanized equipment to make a satisfactory cut. As the alloy
content of the steel increases, the difficulty in obtaining a satisfactory cut also increases.
Elements which form refractory oxides (such as chromium) will interfere with the cutting
operation since these oxides have a melting point higher than the melting point of the
metal. For this reason, the oxyfuel process is rarely used to cut high alloy steels and
stainless steels (special variations are needed to make these cuts, such as the addition of
iron powder to the gas stream).

Plasma Arc Cutting

The heat source for plasma arc cutting is an extremely high temperature (may approach
30,000F) jet of plasma gas. In a plasma gas torch, an arc is established between a
tungsten electrode and a constricting nozzle, creating the plasma gas. The plasma gas is
conductive, so when the torch is brought into position near to the material to be cut, the
arc is transferred to the material (assuming it is connected to the circuit). For cutting
operations, a high velocity flow of the high temperature plasma gas essentially vaporizes
the metal and ejects it from the cut location.

This process may be used on nearly all metals. The high temperature heat source and the
fact that the cutting environment is not oxidizing, both contribute to the solution of the
problems associated with oxyfuel gas cutting processes. One, oxides are not generally
created at the molten surface due to the shielding effects of the plasma gas and the
shielding gas used in the process. Two, since the heat source is such a high temperature,
the resulting cut will occur rapidly, minimizing the effect on the adjacent material.

17-2
Carbon-Arc Gouging and Cutting

Carbon-Arc gouging and cutting is a technically straight forward process. An arc


between a carbon (copper coated) electrode and the metal to be removed is initiated,
melting the metal. A jet of compressed air ejects the melted material. The equipment
used is essentially the same as that used for SMAW, except higher current levels are
often required. The process is used to remove unwanted welds, create joint preparations,
and to cut material.

The material surface after this process is properly used is reasonably free of heavy oxides
and may not be greatly affected by the heat of the process. This is because the molten
material is removed rapidly and the jet of compressed air cools the material. A minimal
depth may be affected by the air quench but is easily penetrated during and subsequent
welding operations. Stainless steels and reactive metals will likely require cleanup prior
to welding however, since the oxides may be quite tenacious.

NONTHERMAL PROCESSES

Dimensionally accurate material removal can be accomplished using nonthermal


processes. An added benefit and reason to use these methods is to minimize or eliminate
the effect on the material. Even a minimal surface layer affected by heat or with residual
stresses may make the material more susceptible to corrosion than desired. Care must be
taken to deal with these issues in critical environments.

Machining

Machining is a dimensionally accurate process but can result in some surface residual
stresses and thermal effects on the material. The effect can be minimized by using
cooling during machining, taking a final light cut, and using properly prepared and sharp
cutting bits. The thermal and residual stress effects are of little consequence on materials
that will be subsequently welded. Surface residual stresses and thermally degraded
material can result in some loss of corrosion resistance. Also, the fluid used during
machining must be removed prior to any welding.

17-3
Grinding

Grinding may be a dimensionally accurate process also but can result in some thermal
effects on the material. The effect can be minimized by using a wet grinding process or
by using progressively finer grit sizes. For service in high corrosion environments, the
final grit size may even be essentially a polishing process. Heavy manual grinding may
result in significant thermal effects and residual stresses that could be detrimental in
certain service conditions. Care should be taken to prevent stray grinding gouges and
marks.

Water Jet Cutting and Gouging58

Water jet cutting and gouging rarely causes changes in the material properties or
introduces residual stress but it must be controlled to yield a successful dimensional
result. The principle of water jet cutting is erosion of the metal resulting from the high
pressure (up to 60,000 psi) water jet. While the water used may not have abrasive
material added, it is faster and can handle thicker materials if it does. It is not a
particularly fast process and involves fairly expensive equipment so the primary use is for
those materials and applications where a thermal effect or residual stresses would be
detrimental under the service conditions.

Electrical Discharge Machining59

Electrical discharge machining (EDM) rarely causes changes in the material properties or
introduces residual stress but it must also be controlled to yield a successful dimensional
result. EDM is the erosion of the material as a result of electrical spark impingement
through a dielectric liquid (e.g. oil). As the electrode is moved into the material while
maintaining a gap, the sparks causes the loss of small particles of material which is then
flushed out of the machined cavity by the flowing dielectric liquid. This process is
repeated until the cavity of removed material assumes the shape of the electrode.

Mechanical Discharge Machining60

Mechanical discharge machining (MDM) is similar to EDM in that an electrode is used.


In MDM, however, the electrode is made to contact the material being machined, creating
an arc. This arc causes the removal of the material which is flushed out of the cavity as is
done with EDM. MDM is a significantly more rapid process (4-5 times more rapid) but
has poor control over tolerances. It is therefore considered to be a process to
decommission components by cutting more than a machining process.

17-4
18
WELDING AND RELATED PROCESSES

Welding is used to join base materials and also to deposit new metal for the purposes of
build-up, corrosion resistance, and hard surfacing. There are many different welding
processes but for nuclear repair or replacement, only a few are commonly used, all of
which involve the melting of the base metals and of the filler metal (if used). As
discussed in Section I, Chapter 5, welding process procedures and the personnel using
them must be qualified per the requirements of ASME Section IX61 although there may
be some nuclear related repairs/replacements that are done with procedure qualified to
other codes (e.g., AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code - Steel62). The selection of the
process to be used is based on the factors covered in Section I, Chapter 4. The common
welding processes used for repair or replacement include gas tungsten arc welding
(GTAW), shielded metal arc welding (SMAW), and flux cored arc welding (FCAW). In
addition to these processes, the processes of gas metal arc welding (GMAW), submerged
arc welding (SAW), and laser welding (LW) have been used for fabrication of
subassemblies or for special applications.

Brazing is a related process where the base metals are not melted during the process but
are joined by molten filler metal (where the filler metal melting point exceeds 840F
(540C)). Typically the only brazing process used for nuclear repair/replacement is torch
brazing (TB). Again, qualification per the requirements of ASME Section IX is required.

Gas Tungsten Arc Welding

Gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) is often used in nuclear applications due to the high
quality capabilities of this process. The arc is generally very controllable and the weld
pool very visible due to the absence of smoke created by flux. The limitations of manual
filler metal additions into the weld pool result in fairly low deposition rates. However,
GTAW is often the welding process of choice for open butt root joints and in critical
applications. In addition, the ability of this process to be automated, even to the point of
remote viewing and control, further lends value to the use of GTAW in nuclear
applications where radiation exposure is a problem and in those applications where
difficult access welds may be required. GTAW should be avoided when welding on
metal that has been previously welded with flux bearing welding processes or on metal
that has not been thoroughly cleaned since porosity may occur.

18-1
Shielded Metal Arc Welding

Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) is also often used in nuclear applications due to the
ease of set-up and application. The flux coating on the electrodes provide shielding, arc
stability, and fluxing of the molten weld pool but leaves a slag coating on the weld
surface which must be removed prior to subsequent passes. Depending on the electrode
diameters and the weld parameters, the SMAW process will likely result in somewhat
higher deposition rates than the GTAW process, lending to its use for filling out thicker
joints. Electrodes designated as low hydrogen types (Exx15, 16, or 18) are the only types
usually used in nuclear applications (for carbon, low alloy, and stainless steels).

Gas Metal Arc Welding63

Gas metal Arc Welding (GMAW) offers higher deposition rates than the manual GTAW
and SMAW processes. However there are some inherent problems associated with this
process that is dependent on the mode of transfer of the molten metal from the electrode
to the molten weld pool. These modes of transfer are spray, globular, and short-
circuiting. Spray transfer is normally seen at high current densities when argon is the
predominate shielding gas. This transfer mode is characterized by the stream of small
droplets of molten material across a smooth and steady arc. Excellent penetration is
normally achieved with this transfer mode. However, a result of the large volume of
molten metal is that this mode is normally only used in the flat or horizontal positions.

Globular transfer also may involve high current densities but the predominate gas is CO2.
In this mode, the metal droplets form at the end of the welding electrode and are larger in
diameter than the electrode. When the large droplet is propelled into the molten weld
pool, spatter can result. Again this mode of transfer is normally used only in the flat or
horizontal positions.

Short-circuiting transfer occurs when the melt-off rate of the electrode is exceeded by the
wire feed speed. This occurs when the process is used with relatively lower current
density. The shielding gas is typically argon rich (such as 75% Ar-25% CO2) but may
also be CO2. The weld deposit occurs with this process when the electrode contacts the
molten weld pool (short-circuits) and the resulting rapid rise in current levels causes the
transfer. This transfer mode allows the use of the GMAW process in all positions and for
open root welds. However it is relatively susceptible to nonfusion type discontinuities,
particularly in thicker materials. As a result, the performance qualification requirements
for this process are more restrictive when using the short-circuiting mode of transfer.
The following table (Table II-2.1)shows a few typical welding schedules64 that would
typically be used when welding with the short-circuiting mode of transfer. These may be
used to assist in determining if a GMAW process is using the short-circuiting mode of

18-2
transfer. In general, short-circuiting transfer should be avoided due to the potential for
nonfusion discontinuities unless tight controls or specialized equipment are used to
provide additional assurance of adequate fusion.

GMAW Short-Circuiting Transfer Schedules


Material Electrode Welding Arc Voltage Wire Feed Travel Shielding
Thickness Diameter Current (dcep) (in. /min.) Speed (in. Gas Flow
(in.) (in.) (Amps) /min.) (ft3/hr.)
0.020 0.030 25-40 15-17 75-90 10-20 15-20
0.031 0.030 40-60 15-17 90-130 18-22 15-20
0.037 0.035 55-85 15-17 70-120 35-40 15-20
0.250 0.035 140-160 19-22 240-290 11-15 20-25
0.125 0.045 180-200 20-24 210-240 27-32 20-25
0.250 0.045 180-225 20-24 210-260 12-18 20-25
Note: Schedules for single pass flat and horizontal fillet welds. Current would be reduced
10-15% for vertical or overhead positions.
Shielding gas is CO2 or 75% Ar-25% CO2.
Table II-2.1: GMAW Short-Circuiting Transfer Schedules

Other alternatives are available with special equipment for GMAW welding. This
equipment may provide current pulses to change the characteristics of a specific mode of
transfer, such as the short-circuiting transfer. This may offer a solution to the
susceptibility of short-circuiting mode to nonfusion discontinuities. Other alternatives
may change the transfer mode during the course of the process such that both good fusion
and good positional characteristics exist (this is often termed the pulsed-arc mode of
transfer).

Flux Cored Arc Welding65

Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) is also a high productivity process. Although this may
be considered an independent process by some, the FCAW process is defined as a
variation of the GMAW process. The variables required during qualification are
therefore essentially the same as those required for the GMAW process. The FCAW
process, as the name implies, uses a flux filled tubular electrode rather than a solid
electrode. The flux offers the possibility that this process could be used with no added
shielding gas, although it is normally used with shielding gas for high quality
applications. As with SMAW, the flux provides shielding, arc stability, and fluxing of
the molten weld pool but leaves a slag coating on the weld surface which must be
removed prior to subsequent passes. The higher current density (due to the lower
electrode cross sectional area) and the flux cause this process to operate primarily in the
globular transfer mode. The large range of parameters allows the process to be used in
all positions, however.

18-3
Plasma Arc Welding66

Plasma Arc Welding (PAW) is similar to the GTAW process regarding the equipment
and the techniques used. However, the arc is constricted in the PAW process, resulting in
higher energy density. This constriction is accomplished by directing the ionized gas
(plasma) through an orifice, concentrating the energy. This characteristic allows the root
to be made using a keyhole technique, which virtually assures a complete penetration
weld. Plasma arc processes are also used for hard surfacing by adding a metallic powder
to the plasma stream, causing a deposit on the surface of the material.

Torch Brazing

Torch Brazing (TB) is a process that is often used in repair applications where copper
alloys are involved, although the process may also be used with other materials. Brazing
differs from welding in that the base metals are not melted but the filler metal is. It also
differs from the lower temperature process of soldering by the temperature at which the
filler metal is molten (>840F (450C) is considered brazing). The equipment used for
the manual process is a simple oxyfuel torch similar to the torch described for oxyfuel
cutting, but without the apparatus for a pure oxygen jet. The brazing process depends on
3 primary characteristics to achieve joint strength; filler metal strength, faying (surface to
be brazed) surface area, and clearances between parts to be brazed. There are a number
of different filler materials available that would be chosen for different strengths and
material combinations, and for different environmental conditions.

Brazing qualifications are covered by ASME Section IX (see Section I, Chapter 5).
These qualifications are somewhat difficult, due to the need to maintain the tight
clearances and tolerances needed for brazing and also to address the faying surface area
(insertion depth for socket joints) required by the design. Brazer performance
qualifications also require that special variables be addressed, such as the maximum
insertion depth (the minimum is required for procedure qualification) and the maximum
diameter to be brazed (welding performance qualification addresses the minimum
diameter).

Soldering

Soldering is a process similar to brazing except the filler metal melting point is less than
840F (450C). The qualification of the soldering process is not controlled by ASME
Section IX, however. Some codes do require the control of soldering by using
procedures outlined in reference documents such as ASTM B82867 or the Copper Tube
Handbook68. The soldering process should not be used in locations or services where
high temperatures may be reached.

18-4
19
HEAT TREATMENT

The purpose of heat treatment is to alter its physical properties. In the case of post weld
heat treatment, the primary purposes are normally to reduce the localized residual stresses
which remain after welding and/or to temper the hardened weld heat affected zone. The
heat treatment of weldments is therefore called both post weld heat treatment (PWHT)
and stress relief although PWHT is the preferred term. Preheat also has an effect on the
heat affected zone hardness and on residual stresses so discussion of preheat is also
warranted. Heat treatment is a special process (see Section I, Chapter 4) which
requires qualification. In the case of PWHT, this qualification is a part of the welding
procedure qualification (as is the preheat).

Material heat treatments, as specified in the material specifications (see Section II), are
done to achieve the specific properties desired for the particular material. In the case of
material heat treatments not covered by material specifications, a qualification is needed
to show that the end result is as desired.

Preheat

The use of preheat for welding is a valuable tool to improve the chances of achieving
welds of adequate quality. The weld area is preheated to some minimum temperature, as
dictated by the welding procedure, and is maintained during welding. In some cases, the
preheat temperature is even maintained after welding and prior to a required PWHT. The
basic purpose of preheat is to slow the cooling rate down and to provide a better
temperature transition across the weldment area during welding.

Preheating will slow the cooling rate down significantly (depending on the preheat
temperature and the welding parameters) due to the reduction of the temperature
difference between the base metal and the area heated by the weld. This slower cooling
rate will have multiple effects on the weld. One effect is to reduce the formation of high
hardness areas (martensite) and therefore reduce the incidence of cracking resulting from
the weld and to increase the overall ductility of the weldment. In materials of high
hardenability, this is very important. A second important effect of preheat is to maintain
the higher temperature of the material longer, which allows hydrogen to diffuse out of the
material. This is also the reason that the preheat temperature may be maintained until
PWHT. (See Hydrogen Cracking in Section I, Chapter 6.) A third effect of preheat is

19-1
the reduction of residual stresses, which occurs due to the material staying at a higher
temperature longer and also due to a more even cooling across the weldment.

Preheating is typically required whenever the material may be significantly affected by


the rapid cooling rates occurring during welding. A good measure of the hardenability of
the material is the carbon equivalent (see the Introduction for Chapters 2 through 5 of
Section II). As the carbon equivalent increases, so does the hardenability. Unfortunately,
the criteria for preheat in the various Codes used in power plants do not normally use the
carbon equivalent as a basis for determining the need for preheat. The normal approach
is to require preheat based on the ASME Section IX69 P Nos. which in a general way
addresses hardenability by the major alloy composition of the materials. Some Codes
further refine this criterion by specific limits on strength or alloy content, within each P
No.

A second criterion used within the Codes to delineate the preheat requirement is the
thickness of the material. A thicker material will provide a greater heat sink (conduction
of heat away from the higher temperature weld) and will result in a more rapid cooling
rate. This is countered by requiring preheat on the thicker materials.

Other criteria, although not often addressed specifically in the Codes, include the thermal
conductivity of the material, the material ductility, and the welding process and
parameters. High thermal conductivity not only acts as a greater heat sink but also may
contribute to nonfusions at the weld fusion line. High conductivity materials may need
preheat in order to achieve a satisfactory weld. Low ductility materials (such as irons)
are subject to cracking during welding. Preheat may be used to increase the ductility and
also to reduce the residual stresses that cause the cracking to occur. Finally the welding
process and parameters may also be a factor. Low heat input processes and parameters
allow more rapid cooling to occur (i.e. there is less heat to get rid of). Some processes
are also more susceptible to hydrogen cracking (flux bearing processes), which may
dictate the use of preheat to assist in alleviating the problem.

Preheat can be accomplished by several methods, including flame, resistance heating, and
induction heating. It is important that the heating be reasonably even in the weld area,
meeting the minimum temperature requirements. This may be difficult with manual
torches except on small components. Preheat using manual torches is generally not
recommended for components larger than NPS2 unless the temperatures are monitored
for even distribution or multiple torches are used. Also, manual torches are generally not
recommended for materials that require elevated preheat >300F (150C) as local yielding
could occur. If the weld will receive a PWHT, it is common to pre-position the required
PWHT equipment to perform preheat. The preheat temperature may be monitored with
temperature indication crayons, pyrometers, or thermocouples.

19-2
Preheat should be maintained on some materials until PWHT is done to avoid potential
problems with hydrogen cracking (see Section I, Chapter 6). A hydrogen bake out (see
following) may be used instead of the preheat maintenance. On more hardenable
materials, it may be advantageous to wrap the weld area with insulating blankets to
maintain the elevated temperature for a longer time and to provide for slower and more
even cooling.

Interpass Temperature Control

Some welding procedures require the interpass temperatures be limited to a specified


maximum. (The required preheat temperature is always the minimum temperature.) This
may be for the reason of maintaining impact toughness per Code rules or to maintain
other properties specific to the material. Interpass temperatures should be determined
immediately prior to welding, usually during the change of electrodes or filler metals
during manual welding, prior to additional layers during low heat input semi-automatic
welding, and during the welding process for high heat input semiautomatic processes or
continuous automatic or machine processes. The interpass temperature should be
determined in the area about to be welded and may be determined by the same methods
as used for determining preheat.

In some cases, interpass temperature control may even use forced cooling in order to
speed up the overall welding time. This cooling is done only on those materials that are
not hardenable by heat treatment (i.e., quenching) such as austenitic stainless steel and
some nickel based alloys. In these materials the rapid cooling helps to prevent
sensitization (see Section II, Chapter 7 and following discussion on solution annealing).

Forced cooling may even have a benefical effect on the stress profile in the weld joint
(potentially causing compressive residual stresses at the root). The use of forced cooling
to affect the stress profile is called heat sink welding and is accomplished by water flow
in piping after the initial layer(s) are completed. This method requires some analysis and
potentially specific qualification to assure the desired results.

Intermediate Heat Treatment (Hydrogen Bake-Out)

For those materials and processes that are susceptible to hydrogen cracking, an
intermediate heat treatment (often referred to as a hydrogen bake-out) is often needed
whenever preheat is eliminated prior to PWHT. The purpose of this heat treatment is to
allow the hydrogen trapped in the crystalline matrix of the material to diffuse out of the

19-3
material. This will essentially eliminate the possibility of hydrogen cracking (see Section
II, Chapter 6). This heat treatment is not intended to alter the properties of the material.

Intermediate heat treatment may be accomplished by the same means as preheat but using
manual torch heating is not recommended. In most cases, this heat treatment would not
be required unless a PWHT would be also required so the use of the same pre-positioned
equipment as used for the preheat and PWHT is common.

Postweld Heat Treatment (PWHT)

As stated earlier, postweld heat treatment is primarily required to temper the weldment
and/or to reduce or eliminate residual stresses. Tempering the weldment (see the
description of Tempering in the following) addresses the high hardness which may be
present after welding due to the rapid thermal cooling of the weld and the adjacent heat
affected zone (HAZ). Tempering is a time/temperature process so the temperature
reached during PWHT, the heating and cooling rates, and the holding time at the PWHT
temperature are factors which determine the resulting properties of the weldment. The
temperature required by the Codes is typically chosen to approach, but not exceeding, the
lower transformation temperature of the material (see following). The holding times and
the heating and cooling rates are specified by the Codes; holding times are based on the
thickness of the material. (See the discussion on Material Tempering following.)

The reduction of residual stresses is accomplished in two ways. An immediate reduction


is achieved upon the increase in temperature of the weldment. This occurs since the
maximum residual stress that can exist is the yield strength of the material; above the
yield point the material strains (yields). Additional time at the PWHT temperature results
in relaxation and recrystallization of the strained material, thereby reducing or essentially
eliminating the residual stresses. Some creep relaxation may also be involved. (See the
discussion on Material Stress Relief following.)

The criteria used within the Codes to specify the PWHT requirements are quite
complicated and not very consistent. As a result, the specific requirements need to be
determined from the Code requirements and from the qualified welding procedure to be
used. The differences that exist include the temperatures (and temperature ranges), the
use of preheat, the heating and cooling rates, the holding times, the definition of the
thicknesses to be used to determine any exemptions, and the types of welds being made.
Care must be taken when welding dissimilar materials since the requirements for PWHT
of one material may actually degrade other materials. When the material being welded
has a material heat treatment that includes a tempering process (see following and the
material heat treatment requirements given in Section II), the time and temperature of the
PWHT must be closely monitored to avoid degradation of the strength properties of the
material. PWHT at a temperature or extension of time significantly in excess of the

19-4
material heat treatment tempering requirements will result in reduced strengths from the
original properties.

If the material is required to have minimum impact toughness, the welding procedure
must be qualified with consideration not only of the temperature but also of the total time
of PWHT. This total time includes not only the PWHT done during repair but also any
fabrication PWHTs.

In general, given the difficulties mentioned above, the need to perform PWHT per Code
requirements on a weld is determined by the material, the thickness, and the hardenability
(as determined by the composition or strength of the material). This is normally all taken
into consideration during qualification of the welding procedure since PWHT is a
required (essential) variable.

Code requirements for PWHT include the heating and cooling rate requirements, holding
times, minimum and maximum temperatures (some codes do not formally specify the
maximum), and the area that is required to be included in the heat treatment (for local
PWHT). PWHT may be done in shop conditions in a furnace. However furnace PWHT
is rarely an option within plant settings and must therefore be done locally. Some
direction for local PWHT is given in the applicable Codes. Additional guidance may be
found In AWS D10.10/D10.10M:199970.

Material Heat Treatment

Following is a brief description of some of the heat treatments that are commonly
required by material specifications. This is not an all inclusive list as there are many
variations and combinations of heat treatments that are done to achieve the desired
properties. The choice is highly dependent on the specific base and alloy of material, as
well as the conditions of processing.

Annealing71

Annealing is a heat treatment intended primarily to soften metallic materials. This is


accomplished by heating and holding the material at a temperature that first causes an
essentially complete transformation to an austenitic structure and then at a temperature
that promotes transformation to a soft ferritic structure.

19-5
Normalizing72

Normalizing is a heat treatment intended achieve specific properties related to the alloy
of the steel involved. As in annealing, the material is first heated to cause full
transformation to a homogeneous austenitic structure but then is cooled in still or slightly
agitated air for a normalizing heat treatment. This is a more rapid cooling than occurs
with annealing where the cooling rate is controlled to complete the transformation to the
ferritic structure. The result is a less coarse microstructure. In air hardenable materials,
normalizing results in a hardened microstructure that may require further heat treatment
(such as tempering) to achieve the required material properties.

Tempering73

Tempering is a heat treatment intended to increase ductility and toughness by heating to a


temperature below the lower critical temperature for specific lengths of time in order to
achieve the desired material properties. In a material that has been hardened by rapid
cooling from an austenitic structure to create a martensitic structure, tempering allows
some transformation to a ferritic structure, thereby resulting in a more ductile material of
lower strength. The strength level is controlled by the temperature and time of the
tempering heat treatment. In quenched or normalized materials that are subsequently
tempered, care is required to avoid fabrication processes that result in higher
temperatures or longer times at high temperatures (such as PWHT, hot forming, high heat
input welding, etc.) or the specific properties may be degraded from that desired and
expected of the material.

Stress Relief74

Stress relief heat treatment may be used to reduce or eliminate residual stresses that could
be detrimental to the conditions expected during service. Materials can be more
susceptible to environmental or service related cracking mechanisms (such as Stress
Corrosion Cracking or fatigue) if a high level of residual stress remains on welded or cold
strained material. Stress relief is accomplished in the same manner as PWHT, where the
material temperature is raised to a level somewhat below the lower critical temperature
and then cooled at a uniform rate.

Solution Annealing75

Solution annealing (sometimes called quench annealing) is a heat treating procedure that
is intended to re-dissolve metallic carbides or other constituents that form during casting
or welding processes. When the alloying metal is chromium, the existence of the
chromium carbides and the resulting chromium depleted zones is commonly referred to
as sensitization. This characteristic causes the material to be subject to intergranular

19-6
corrosion. Solution annealing is accomplished by heating the material to a high
temperature, causing the metallic carbides to re-dissolve, and then quenching the material
in water or air at a rate that would not allow the carbides to reform.

19-7
20
OTHER PROCESSES
A number of other processes may be used to address specific issues during a repair.
These processes may need to be considered as special processes (see Section I,
Chapters 4 & 5).

Freeze Seals

Freeze seals (freeze plugs) are used to isolate sections of piping for the purpose of repair
or testing needs. The concept involves cooling the outside surface of the pipe containing
a liquid that will subsequently freeze to form a plug inside the pipe. This plug is an
effective isolation block that will then allow downstream piping to be evacuated for the
repair activity. If a leak test is required, the plug also provides a method of isolating a
section of pipe that can then be tested rather than unnecessarily leak testing a potentially
much longer pipe section between existing valves.

The most commonly used coolants for freeze seals are liquid nitrogen and dry ice
(CO2)76. Smaller diameter pipes may be freeze sealed using CO2 poured in a liquid form
into a cloth or Styrofoam jacket. Larger pipes may require a liquid nitrogen coolant. In
the case of the liquid nitrogen approach, two techniques may be used. One is to build a
jacket around the pipe such that the liquid nitrogen is in direct contact with the outside of
the pipe. The second technique is to build a jacket that contains the liquid nitrogen and is
in thermal contact with the pipe.

The application of freeze seals can result in several safety concerns. In a confined space,
the use of CO2 or nitrogen can replace the breathable air. Precautions must be taken to
ventilate the area and to monitor for oxygen deficiencies.

The integrity of the pipe in the area of a freeze seal is important. Prior to initiating a
freeze seal, the pipe area should be examined for discontinuities that could cause the pipe
to rupture77. Carbon and low alloy steels that have poor fracture toughness properties at
the temperatures reached during the freeze sealing process should elicit additional
caution. The application of a freeze seal in a limited volume application could cause the
pipe between the constraints to overpressure and potentially rupture, due to the expansion
of the ice plug during the process. This may be the result of multiple freeze seals used

20-1
with an inadequate volume between the seals or it may be the application of a freeze seal
close to a closed valve.

Finally, the integrity of the frozen plug in the pipe is critical. Freeze seals, particularly in
larger diameter pipes, are susceptible to rapid degradation and failure if a flow remains
after an incompletely formed ice plug. This can happen if the process is performed when
a flow exists in the pipe. Even a small flow can prevent the proper formation of the ice
plug. The ice plug is always an hourglass shape and the flow will not allow the formation
of a fully formed plug. Another flow problem may occur when the freeze seal is initiated
too close to a tee where the adjacent flow acts as a heat source.

While properly formed ice plugs can contain significant pressures, freeze seals should be
closely monitored. Particularly when the objective is to isolate a pipe section so a repair
or replacement can be made, the loss of the ice plug can be catastrophic. Contingency
plans are advised to minimize or eliminate the negative consequences of the loss of an ice
plug.

Shot Peening

Controlled shot peening has been shown to cause compressive residual stress on the
surface of stainless steel components78 79. Stress corrosion cracking (SCC) requires
tensile stress conditions as well as the corrosive environment and the material condition.
The existence of compressive stress at the surface therefore eliminates the potential for
SCC. Shot peening can also contribute to the improvement of fatigue properties80.

20-2
21
REPAIR TECHNIQUES

Repairs may include specific techniques to achieve a particular characteristic or to


address particular problems. These may also require the need to include the technique
during the qualification of the parent special process.

On-Line Repair Techniques


A series of repair techniques have been developed by EPRI to perform on-line repair of
leaking pipes and components. Refer to EPRI Reports TR-108132, On-Line Repair for
Leaking Pipe Components81, and TR-108133, On-Line Seal Welding of Pipe Cracks82.

Overlays
Overlay techniques may be used to recover wall thicknesses or to reinforce thinned areas
of piping components. ASME Code Cases N-504-283, Alternative Rules for Repair of
Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping, N-561-184, Alternative Requirements for Wall
Thickness Restoration of Class 2 and High Energy Class 3 Carbon Steel Piping, and N-
562-185, Alternative Requirements for Wall Thickness Restoration of Class 3 Moderate
Energy Carbon Steel Piping, describes overlay requirements for various nuclear plant
classes and materials.

Temper Bead
Temper bead welding is defined as the placement of a weld bead at a specific location in
or at the surface of a weld for the purpose of affecting the metallurgical properties of the
heat-affected-zone or previously deposited weld metal.
Metallurgical properties of the heat-affected zone (HAZ) are affected by the temperature
that is reached in the heat-affected zone as shown in Figure 1. Portions of the heat-
affected zone that exceed the lower transformation temperature (A1) are subject of
formation of non-equilibrium-cooled microstructures upon cooling. Specifically, slow
cooling produces ferrite and carbide (pearlite), rapid cooling produces martensite and, for
some alloys, intermediate cooling rates produce bainite. See Figure 2. Martensite is
generally not a preferred microstructure since it is hard and brittle. Martensite can,
however, be softened and its toughness increased by reheating the microstructure to just
below the lower transformation temperature; this is known as tempering. Bainite is
generally an acceptable microstructure that results in good mechanical properties.
In addition to possibly forming less-than-desirable microstructures upon cooling, the
portion of the HAZ that exceeds approximately 1900F (1040C) will exhibit grain
growth. See Figure 3. As grains enlarge, the toughness of the steel tends to drop. The
result is that there will be a variety of microstructures in the HAZ, including the coarse-
grain region that exhibits reduced toughness. See Figure 4.

21-1
The essence of temper bead welding is to control subsequent weld beads (both
overlapping and subsequent layers) so that the appropriate level of overlap of HAZs
improves the properties of the previously-deposited weld metal and HAZ. See Figures 5,
6 and 7.
Temper bead welding techniques have been permitted on a limited basis for ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code construction and for repairs to ASME Code vessels and
boilers since the early 1960s. The resulting rules provide for a variety of prescriptive
methods that may be used.
ASME Section III, Nuclear Components, NB-4600, has permitted since its inception the
use of temper bead welding for new construction where postweld heat treatment of a
component had already been completed but a minor weld repair had to be made and
postweld heat treatment was impractical. ASME Section XI, Inservice Inspection, IWB-
4600, has also permitted use of temper bead welding when making repairs to nuclear
components where postweld heat treatment was not practical.

Liquid
Austenite

Upper Transformation (A3)

1350F (730C)

Lower Transformation (A1)

Alpha Iron Ferrite + Carbide

%C
0.8% C

Figure 1 Bead on plate: This diagram shows various parts of the heat-affected zone
related to the equilibrium phase diagram.

21-2
Austenite
Ar1

Pearlite

Bainite
Slow Cooling

Rapid Cooling
Intermediate Cooling
Martensite Start

Martensite Finish

10 100 1000 10000 100000


Time (s)

Figure 2 Time-Temperature-Transformation Diagram: This diagram shows the


various microstructures that can result from different cooling rates. The
microstructure produced depends on the chemical analysis of the material and
the specific cooling rate. Different materials have different transformation curves;
generally, the more highly-alloyed a material, the easier it is to transform it into
martensite.

Temper bead welding requirements in the various codes have always been prescriptive.
That is, temper bead welding was permitted if the welding was done a very specific way,
such as:
with a high preheat
the half-bead technique
using a controlled deposition technique.
In the 2003 addenda, ASME Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, added
rules for making welds using temper bead techniques, except that the user is expected to
develop his own technique for doing temper bead welding.

21-3
1900F (1040C)

Liquid
Austenite

Upper Transformation (A3)

1350F
(730C)

Lower Transformation (A1)

Ferrite + Carbide
Alpha Iron

%C
0.8%

Figure 3 Rapid Grain Growth Occurs Above About 1900F (1040C): Although
phase changes occur above the A1 temperature, grain growth does not occur until the
metal reaches about 1900F (1040C). Grain growth results in degradation of
toughness.

21-4
Liquid (Cast)

Coarse Grain
Fine Grain
Intercritical
Subcritical
Tempered

Figure 4 Nomenclature of various regions in the HAZ: Heat-affected zones are quite
complex. Coarse grains are formed near the weld metal and this typically reduces
toughness. Fine grain structure zones are frequently tougher than the original base
metal.

Figure 5 Weld Beads with Minimum HAZ Overlap: Overlap results in tempering and
refinement the coarse-grain zone .and previously deposited weld metal. This improves
properties somewhat but leaves large amounts of the previous structure untempered.

21-5
A

Figure 6 Weld Beads with Plenty of Overlap: An adequate amount of overlap results
in significantly more tempering and refinement the coarse-grain zone. and previously
deposited weld metal than happened in Figure 5. A second layer of weld metal will
result in further tempering and refinement coarse-grain zone. Control of overlap,
thickness of the weld bead and the energy provided by subsequent layers can improve
the properties of the heat-affected zone and previously deposited weld metal.

21-6
A

Figure 7 Weld Beads with Plenty of Overlap and a Second Layer: A second layer of
weld metal further modifies the microstructure of the previously deposited weld metal
and heat-affected zones. If the weld beads are appropriately sized relative to each
other, the properties of both the previously deposited weld metal and heat-affected zone
are improved.

Temper bead welding is defined as the placement of a weld bead at a specific location in
or at the surface of a weld for the purpose of affecting the metallurgical properties of the
heat-affected-zone or previously deposited weld metal.
Metallurgical properties of the heat-affected zone (HAZ) are affected by the temperature
that is reached in the heat-affected zone as shown in Figure 1. Portions of the heat-
affected zone that exceed the lower transformation temperature (A1) are subject of
formation of non-equilibrium-cooled microstructures upon cooling. Specifically, slow
cooling produces ferrite and carbide (pearlite), rapid cooling produces martensite and, for
some alloys, intermediate cooling rates produce bainite. See Figure 2. Martensite is
generally not a preferred microstructure since it is hard and brittle. Martensite can,
however, be softened and its toughness increased by reheating the microstructure to just
below the lower transformation temperature; this is known as tempering. Bainite is
generally an acceptable microstructure that results in good mechanical properties.
In addition to possibly forming less-than-desirable microstructures upon cooling, the
portion of the HAZ that exceeds approximately 1900 F will exhibit grain growth. See
Figure 3. As grains enlarge, the toughness of the steel tends to drop. The result is that
there will be a variety of microstructures in the HAZ, including the coarse-grain region
that exhibits reduced toughness. See Figure 4.

21-7
The essence of temper bead welding is to control subsequent weld beads (both
overlapping and subsequent layers) so that the appropriate level of overlap of HAZs
improves the properties of the previously-deposited weld metal and HAZ. See Figures 5,
6 and 7.
Temper bead welding techniques have been permitted on a limited basis for ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code construction and for repairs to ASME Code vessels and
boilers since the early 1960s. The resulting rules provide for a variety of prescriptive
methods that may be used.
ASME Section III, Nuclear Components, NB-4600, has permitted since its inception the
use of temper bead welding for new construction where postweld heat treatment of a
component had already been completed but a minor weld repair had to be made and
postweld heat treatment was impractical. ASME Section XI, Inservice Inspection, IWB-
4600, has also permitted use of temper bead welding when making repairs to nuclear
components where postweld heat treatment was not practical.
Temper bead welding requirements in the various codes have always been prescriptive.
That is, temper bead welding was permitted if the welding was done a very specific way,
such as:

with a high preheat


the half-bead technique
using a controlled deposition technique.
In the 2003 addenda, ASME Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications, added
rules for making welds using temper bead techniques, except that the user is expected to
develop his own technique for doing temper bead welding.

21-8
22
REFERENCES

1
Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 2001.
2
Code for Power Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1, 2001.
3
Code for Nuclear Power Piping, USAS Code for Pressure Piping, B31.7, 1969.
4
Pressure Vessels, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, 2001.
5
Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, 2001.
6
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, 2001.
7
R.S. Pathania, Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary Applications, EPRI 1003072,
December, 2001.
8
R.S. Pathania, Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary Applications, EPRI 1003072,
December, 2001.
9
Code of Federal Regulations, Part 10, 10 CFR 50, Appendix B, Quality Assurance Criteria for Nuclear
Power Plants and Fuel Reprocessing Plants.
10
Quality Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Plant Facilities, ASME, 2000.
11
Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 2001.
12
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, 2001..
13
Code for Power Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1, 2001.
14
Standard Welding Procedures, American Welding Society.
15
Nondestructive Examination, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 2001.
16
Personnel Qualification and Certification in Nondestructive Testing, American Society of Nondestructive
Testing, SNT-TC-1A, 1992.
17
ASNT Standard for Qualification and Certification of Nondestructive Testing Personnel, American
Society of Nondestructive Testing, CP-189, 1995.
18
Personal Communication with Jeff Boucher, May, 2003
19
ASTM D-3911, Test Method for Evaluating Coatings Used in Light-Water Nuclear Power Plants at
Simulated Design Basis Accident (DBA) Conditions, American Society of Testing and Materials
20
ASTM D-4227, Practice for Qualification of Coating Applicators for Application of Coatings to
Concrete Surfaces , American Society of Testing and Materials
21
ASTM D-4228, Practice for Qualification of Coating Applicators for Application of Coatings to Steel
Surfaces , American Society of Testing and Materials
22
ASTM D4537, Guide for Establishing Procedures to Qualify and Certify Inspection Personnel for
Coating Work in Nuclear Facilities , American Society of Testing and Materials
23
C.S. Martin and D.C. Wiggert, Water Hammer and Fluid Structure Interaction in Piping Systems, ASME
Short Course Program, 1988.
24
Fontana and Greene, Corrosion Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1967.
25
Metals Handbook Desk Edition, American Society of Metals, 1985.
26
ASM Handbook, Volume 13, Corrosion, Forms of Corrosion, Localized Corrosion, American Society of
Metals, 2003.
27
ASM Handbook, Volume 13, Corrosion, Corrosion of Weldments, American Society of Metals, 2003.
28
W.J. Childs, G.J. Frederick, D.W. Gandy, et al., Service Water System Repair/Replacement Guidelines:
Planning and Implementation, EPRI TR-102410, November, 1993.
29
Welding Steels Without Hydrogen Cracking, 2nd Edition, Abington Publishing, N. Bailey, et al, 1973.
30
ASM Handbook, Volume 6, Welding, Brazing, and Soldering, Cracking Phenomena Associated With
Welding, Hydrogen-Induced Cracking (Cold Cracking), American Society of Metals, 2003.
31
ASM Handbook, Volume 6, Welding, Brazing, and Soldering, Cracking Phenomena Associated With
Welding, Solidification Cracking (Hot Cracking), American Society of Metals, 2003.

22-1
32
Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, 2001.
33
Materials, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, 2001.
34
Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 2001.
35
Code for Power Piping, ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1, 2001.
36
R.A. Moen, Materials Index, Practical Guide to ASME Section II, Casti Publishing, Inc., 1996
37
Welding Handbook, 8th Edition, Volume 4, Part 2, Materials and Applications, American Welding
Society, 1998
38
R.S. Pathania, Materials Handbook for Nuclear Plant Pressure Boundary Applications, EPRI 1003072,
December, 2001.
39
Metals & Alloys in the Unified Numbering System, Society of Automotive Engineers, SAE HS-1086,
10/2001 and American Society of Testing & Materials, ASTM DS-56H, 2001, 9th Edition
40
ASM Handbook, Volume 3, Phase Diagrams, American Society of Metals, 2003.
41
Material Specifications, American Society of Testing and Materials, Various Editions.
42
Materials, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, 2001.
43
Material Specifications, American Society of Testing and Materials, Various Editions.
44
A McGehee and M Sims, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding, EPRI Report 1006799,
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA, November, 2002
45
Structural Welding Code Steel, American Welding Society, D1.1, 2000, Annex XI, Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.
46
Pressure Vessels, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, 2001.
47
A McGehee and M Sims, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding, EPRI Report 1006799,
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA, November, 2002
48
Structural Welding Code Steel, American Welding Society, D1.1, 2000, Annex XI, Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.
49
A McGehee and M Sims, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding, EPRI Report 1006799,
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA, November, 2002
50
Structural Welding Code Steel, American Welding Society, D1.1, 2000, Annex XI, Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.
51
A McGehee and M Sims, Realistic Carbon Equivalent for Underwater Welding, EPRI Report 1006799,
Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA, November, 2002
52
Structural Welding Code Steel, American Welding Society, D1.1, 2000, Annex XI, Guideline on
Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat.
53
Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, 2001.
54
ASM Handbook, Volume 6, Welding, Brazing, and Soldering, Selection of Nickel, Nickel-Copper,
Nickel-Chromium, and Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys, Postweld Heat Treatment, Table 3, American
Society of Metals, 2003.
55
ASM Handbook, Volume 6, Welding, Brazing, and Soldering, Selection of Nickel, Nickel-Copper,
Nickel-Chromium, and Nickel-Chromium-Iron Alloys, Postweld Heat Treatment, Table 3, American
Society of Metals, 2003.
56
Welding Handbook, 9th Edition, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Survey of Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes,
American Welding Society, 2001.
57
H B Cary, Modern Welding Technology, 4th Edition, Chapter 9, Welding-Related Processes, Prentice
Hall, 1998.
58
Welding Handbook, 9th Edition, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Survey of Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes,
American Welding Society, 2001.
59
ASM Handbook, Volume 16, Machining, Electrical Discharge Machining, Method of Operation,
American Society of Metals, 2003.
60
Personal Communication with Frank Formanek, Independent Consultant, April, 2004.
61
Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 2001.
62
Structural Welding Code Steel, American Welding Society, D1.1, 2000.
63
Welding Handbook, 9th Edition, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Survey of Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes,
American Welding Society, 2001.
64
H B Cary, Modern Welding Technology, 4th Edition, Chapter 9, Welding-Related Processes, Prentice
Hall, 1998.

22-2
65
Welding Handbook, 9th Edition, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Survey of Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes,
American Welding Society, 2001.
66
Welding Handbook, 9th Edition, Volume 1, Chapter 1, Survey of Welding, Cutting and Allied Processes,
American Welding Society, 2001.
67
Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tubes and
Fittings, B828, American Society of Testing and Materials, 2000.
68
Copper Tube Handbook, Copper Development Association, 1995.
69
Welding and Brazing Qualifications, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 2001.
70
Recommended Practices for Local Heating of Welds in Piping and Tubing, D10.10/D10.10M, American
Welding Society, 1999.
71
ASM Handbook, Volume 4, Heat Treating, Annealing of Steel, American Society of Metals, 2003.
72
ASM Handbook, Volume 4, Heat Treating, Normalizing of Steel, American Society of Metals, 2003.
73
ASM Handbook, Volume 4, Heat Treating, Tempering of Steel, American Society of Metals, 2003.
74
ASM Handbook, Volume 4, Heat Treating, Stress-Relief Heat Treating of Steel, American Society of
Metals, 2003.
75
Metals Handbook, Desk Edition, Glossary, American Society of Metals, 1995.
76
Freeze Plug, Unpublished Report, Guide for Selection of Repair Techniques, ASME Post Construction
Repair and Testing Standard, American Society of Mechanical Engineers, 2002.
77
J.F. Kiefner, C.R. Barnes, P.M. Scott, and G. Andrews, Development of Guidelines for Use of Ice Plugs
in Pipeline Maintenance and Hydrostatic Testing, Battelle Columbus Laboratories Report, November 15,
1982.
78
J.C. Danko, R.E. Smith, D.W. Gandy, Effect of Surface Preparation on Crack Initiation in Welded
Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping, EPRI Final Report RP T305-1, 1990.
79
Qualification of Remedial Methods to Prevent Primary-Side Stress Corrosion Cracking of Steam
Generator Tubing, EPRI Final Report NP-5249, Volume 1, 1987.
80
ASM Handbook, Volume 16, Machining, Surface Finish and Surface Integrity, Surface Integrity,
American Society of Metals, 2003.
81
On-Line Welding Repair for Leaking Pipe Components, EPRI Final Report TR-108132, 1998.
82
On-Line Seal Welding of Pipe Cracks, EPRI Final Report TR-108133, 1997.
83
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, Code Case N-504-2, Alternative Rules for Repair of Classes 1, 2, and 3 Austenitic
Stainless Steel Piping, 1997.
84
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, Code Case N-561-1, Alternative Requirements for Wall Thickness Restoration of Class 2
and High Energy Class 3 Carbon Steel Piping, 1998.
85
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, Code Case N-562-1, Alternative Requirements for Wall Thickness Restoration of Class 3
Moderate Energy Carbon Steel Piping, 1998.
85
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, Code Case N-561-1, Alternative Requirements for Wall Thickness Restoration of Class 2
and High Energy Class 3 Carbon Steel Piping, 1998.
85
Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section XI, Code Case N-562-1, Alternative Requirements for Wall Thickness Restoration of Class 3
Moderate Energy Carbon Steel Piping, 1998.

22-3
The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) WARNING: This Document contains
information classified under U.S.
The Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), with Export control regulations as
major locations in Palo Alto, California, and Charlotte, restricted from export outside the
United States. You are under an
North Carolina, was established in 1973 as an
obligation to ensure that you have a
independent, nonprofit center for public interest legal right to obtain access to this information and
energy and environmental research. EPRI brings to ensure that you obtain an export license prior to
any re-export of this information. Special
together member organizations, the Institutes
restrictions apply to access by anyone that is not a
scientists and engineers, and other leading experts to United States citizen or a Permanent United States
work collaboratively on solutions to the challenges of resident. For further information regarding your
electric power. These solutions span nearly every obligations, please see the information contained
below in the section entitled Export Control
area of power generation, delivery, and use, including Restrictions.
health, safety, and environment. EPRIs members
represent over 90% of the electricity generated in the Export Control Restrictions
Access to and use of EPRI Intellectual Property is
United States. International participation represents granted with the specific understanding and requirement
over 10% of EPRIs total R&D program. that responsibility for ensuring full compliance with all
applicable U.S. and foreign export laws and regulations
Together . . . Shaping the Future of Electricity is being undertaken by you and your company. This
includes an obligation to ensure that any individual
receiving access hereunder who is not a U.S. citizen or
permanent U.S. resident is permitted access under
applicable U.S. and foreign export laws and regulations.
In the event you are uncertain whether you or your
company may lawfully obtain access to this EPRI
Intellectual Property, you acknowledge that it is your
obligation to consult with your companys legal counsel
to determine whether this access is lawful. Although
EPRI may make available on a case by case basis an
informal assessment of the applicable U.S. export
classification for specific EPRI Intellectual Property, you
and your company acknowledge that this assessment is
solely for informational purposes and not for reliance
purposes. You and your company acknowledge that it
is still the obligation of you and your company to make
your own assessment of the applicable U.S. export
classification and ensure compliance accordingly. You
and your company understand and acknowledge your
obligations to make a prompt report to EPRI and the
appropriate authorities regarding any access to or use
of EPRI Intellectual Property hereunder that may be in
violation of applicable U.S. or foreign export laws or
regulations.

2005 Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI), Inc. All rights


reserved. Electric Power Research Institute and EPRI are registered
service marks of the Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.
Togethershaping the future of electricity is a service mark of the
Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.

1011648

Printed on recycled paper in the United States of America

Electric Power Research Institute 3412 Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, California 94304 PO Box 10412, Palo Alto, California 94303 USA
800.313.3774 650.855.2121 askepri@epri.com www.epri.com

You might also like